O&M

PROJECT NAME: SECURITY CAR PARKING

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE

FOR

SECURITY CAR PARKING AT ARCAPITA

Client:

ARCAPITA

Contractor:

NILE AUTOMATION SYSTEMS ARABIA

Subcontractor:

DOCUMENT NO:

ARCAPITA– O&M - 001

0 ISSUED FOR

APPROVAL

Rev Date Description of

Revision Prep. Chkd. Appd.

Page 1 of 287

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE – ARCAPITA SECURITYPARKING SOLUTION

DOC. NO.: Arcapita-O&M-001 REVISION: 0

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Operations & Maintenance Manual ............................................................................................... 3

1.1 System Description ............................................................................................................. 3

1.2 Equipment Schedule ........................................................................................................... 3

1.3 Parts Identification & Spares ............................................................................................... 4

1.4 Operations .......................................................................................................................... 4

Following steps shall be followed for trouble shooting ..................................................................... 8

1.5 Maintenance ....................................................................................................................... 8

1.6 Disposal Instructions ........................................................................................................... 9

1.7 Manufacturers ..................................................................................................................... 9

1.8 Emergency Contact Information .......................................................................................... 9

1.9 As-Built drawing Index ...................................................................................................... 10

Attached as per annexure ........................................................................................................... 10

1.10 Manufacturer's literature ................................................................................................. 10

Page 2 of 287



Operations & Maintenance Manual

1.1 System Description

• Description of System & Equipment

This is a PLC based automated security car parking system. The system can be operated both in Manual and Auto mode. The main component is the mechanical wedge barrier operated by a hydraulic cylinder. The limit switches are provided at both ends of the wedge to monitor and control the wedge up and down position.

The Wedge shall be raised or lowered as necessary for the customers to access the car parking. There is a separate car parking slots for visitors. The members or the employees in the building can access the car parking space by swiping their ID card and the wedge lowers down to give them the access in auto mode.

In Manual Mode the security gives permission to the members by lowering the wedge manually using the push button provided in the local control panel. There is a local control panel with lamps, pushbuttons and selector switches for operating the system in both Manual OR Auto modes.

• The system shall operate in one of the mode only. In Manual mode the human intervention is required to operate the wedge up and down. In auto mode the PLC shall receive the desired inputs and shall raise or lower the wedge as stipulated in the functional requirements.

• The number of inputs and outputs connected to the PLC were calculated during the design stage. The IO list was generated with the type and nature of each Inputs/Outputs. The PLC components are selected based on the quantity of Inputs/Outputs. As the system is installed in the basement and in ambient conditions the PLC and its components are selected in such a way that they can withstand a temperature of 70DegC ambient.

• Redundant CPU and power supply is provided in the system to take care of uninterrupted operation in the event of a single point failure.

• The system is designed to operate continuously without any shutdown. The availability of the system is more than 99% and with redundancy the critical components failure is taken care of.

1.2 Equipment Schedule

• PLC system is supplied by M/s Nile Automation Systems Arabia and the PLC hardware is from M/s GE IP. The PLC panel and the local control panel are both supplied by M/s Nile Automation. The local control panel provides both manual control of the wedge barrier together with acting as an interface for the field Inputs/Outputs to PLC.

• The PLC control panel is installed near the entry shutter for cars and near the outgoing wedge barrier. The Local control panel is installed near the reception and the incoming wedge barrier.

• The BOM for the PLC components are as per the attached drawing, Doc.No. : Arcapita. The make of PLC components are from GE. All other electrical components are from Telemecanique.

Page 3 of 287



1.3 Parts Identification & Spares

• BOM is enclosed as per the attached sheet. The spare parts shall be ordered from GE IP directly or from any of their authorized distributors. The same can be ordered through M/s Nile Automation Systems Arabia, Ras-al-Khaimah , UAE

• NILE OFFICE ADDRESS

NILE AUTOMATION SYSTEMS ARABIA,

Ras-Al-Khaimah Free Zone,

PO BOX 16111

Ras-Al-Khaimah,

UAE

Contact Email : [email protected]

[email protected]

Mobile Numbers: 00973 36424320 (Muralidhar)

00973 36424904 (Gautham Shetty)

UAE Number 00971 552522607

1.4 Operations Description of the system

The security system consist of input and output wedge barrier controls to monitor and control the incoming and the outgoing vehicles.

Both incoming and the outgoing security system are identical and hence the incoming wedge barrier controls is explained below

The incoming wedge barrier control system consists of a Hydraulic power pack unit operated together with an electric motor which receives the command from the relay based control circuit. This circuit has the provison to operate through PLC when in auto mode. The PLC shall give a digital output “1” to operate the wedge. Both Raise & Lower wedge commands have separate outputs.

The basic components of the wedge barrier control system is listed below

a. Card Reader – For authorized access, the card reader gives a digital “1” signal to PLC if the access is permitted.

b. Infra Red Beam – This beam will operate and send a digital signal to PLC whenever the car is in between the transmitter and the receiver unit. The infra red beam sends the activated signal whenever the beam is cut thus confirming the presence of car.

c. Entry Loop detector (Loop-1) – Located in front of the wedge barrier on the floor to indicate the presence of car just ahead of the barrier. This is used to trace the movement of the incoming car entering the wedge barrier.

Page 4 of 287



d. Exit Loop detector (Loop-2) – Located behind the wedge barrier on the floor to indicate the exit of the car after it has entered the wedge barrier. Both of them gives a digital input signals to PLC.

e. Traffic Lights- There are two lights Red and Green indicating the permission for vehicle to move. The wedge barriers have traffic lights on both the sides which glow green and red depending on the wedge position. The Green Light shall glow when the wedge is down and the control switch is either in the manual or auto position except in rush mode which shall be explained later in the section.

f. Proximity Switch – There are two proximity switches one in the top and other in the bottom position of the wedge barrier to sense the respective positions of the wedge and issue a stop command for the wedge moving up or down. The proximity switch is also used to operate the green and red light according to the modes defined.

g. Siren – There is one siren fitted on the wedge barrier to alarm the presence of any type of intrusion. A flash light also comes along with the siren whenever there is an alarm. This alarm can be Reset by the security after assessing the situation. This shall be explained in the respective modes.

The system operates in two basic Modes 1) MANUAL and 2) AUTO. The system can operate independently in both the modes. Auto mode signifies the involvement of PLC. If the switch is selected into the Manual mode then the PLC shall be By passed and the operations shall be done using the local push buttons provided in the panel.

1) Manual Mode

This mode can be selected by the operator / security through the selector switch provided in the front of the local control panel at the entry wedge barrier location.

In this mode the wedge barrier can be lifted up or pushed down using the “UP” and “DOWN” push buttons provided in the same local control panel. The operator needs to press either of the push buttons only once.

If the wedge barrier is in “up” position then by pressing the “DOWN” push button once the wedge shall continue to move down until it has hit the bottom. There is a proximity switch provided at the bottom and top position of the barrier which serves as a limit switch. This proximity switches operates when it sense the wedge and cuts off the power to the hydraulic power pack thus stopping the operation.

In this way the wedge barrier is operated up and down till the limits are reached as positioned by the proximity switch. If a “DOWN” command (by pressing manual push button) is issued to wedge, the wedge starts moving down and incase the “UP” command is issued while in operation the wedge stops the downward movement and then starts going up immediately.

This operation is implemented to reduce the movement time of the wedge. The same can be explained when the Wedge is in upward movement. The wedge stops the upward movement and starts going down immediately when the down push button is pressed.

The wedge down position indicates that the vehicle movement is allowed which is also denoted by the Green Lamp indication present on both sides of the wedge barrier.

Page 5 of 287



The wedge up position indicates that the vehicle movement is stopped and is denoted by the Red Lamp indication provided on the sides of the wedge barrier.

2) Auto Mode

This mode can be selected by the operator/security through the selector switch provided in the front of the local control panel. The selector switch has three positions Manual, Off and Auto.

The system while in auto position receives inputs from the field sensors, access card readers, FSMS and operates according to the manner explained below

• There are five sub modes of operation in Auto position , these are listed below

a. Standard Mode

b. Rush Mode

c. Shutter Mode

d. All Open Mode

e. Lock down Mode

f. Fire Mode

Standard Mode

The input shall be received by the PLC from the field sensors, access card readers, FSMS. The value of the Input is ‘0’ from FSMS; the system goes into “STANDARD” mode. In this mode normally the wedge will be in up position thus blocking the vehicular traffic through it. The Shutter will be in raised condition. The Red Lamp shall be glowing indicating the vehicle to stop. This mode shall be used during non-peak hours i.e. when there is lean movement of cars.

Whenever there is an authenticated swipe by the members / employees the permit access signal is given by the card reader to PLC which shall initiate the wedge to move down thus enabling the vehicle to pass through. The infra red beam detector will be switched Off. The loop detector-1 senses the car movement and after the car leaves the exit loop the PLC shall give a command for the wedge to raise. The signal shall glow RED moment the wedge is raised from the bottom position.

In this mode if there is any kind of intrusion i.e. if the infra red beam is cut without the access permit the sounder will initiate an alarm along with the flash lights. The wedge shall not go down preventing unauthorized access of vehicles. The permit is allowed only after the intervention of security personnel or when the access swipe is valid.

Rush Mode

The input shall be received by the PLC from FSMS. The value of Input is ‘1’ from FSMS. The system goes into “RUSH” mode. In this mode the wedge shall automatically go down and the red light will be glowing indicating that vehicle shall be permitted only after adequate authorization.

In this mode the wedge shall not move up and will regulate the vehicular traffic. The Shutter will be in raised condition. This mode is used during the peak hours ie typically during the office hours when there is a lot of rush in the vehicle movement.

Page 6 of 287



Office hours refer to the morning time inrush and the evening time exit only. The exact duration will be decided by the security personnel in consultation with the management.

In this mode initially the red lamp glows while the wedge is in down position. When a card swipe is detected and access is valid the authorized signal is given to PLC which will in turn switch “ON” the green lamp and switches “OFF” the red lamp. The patron then shall move the car which is sensed by the infra red beam and also the entry loop detector-1. The car leaving the loop detector-1 switches the green lamp “OFF” and switches the red lamp “ON”. The authorization will be needed for the next car to pass thru the barrier. The car once leaving the exit loop detector-2 shall reset the authorization of that particular car.

In the even the car cuts the infra red beam without having a valid card access shall initiate siren, flash light and also forces the wedge barrier to move up preventing unauthorized access. This is an undesirable event as this can damage the patron’s car.

Any unauthorized access in the rush mode shall be handled with caution as it may damage the

car.

Shutter Mode

This mode is for non-office hours. In this mode the shutter provided at the entry of the parking level shall remain closed and will be opened only when there is an authorized car access. The value of “2” is received by PLC from FSMS in the mode register. The system goes into “SHUTTER” mode. During this mode, the authorized access card swipe from outside the building at the entry Ramp will initiate the shutter to be raised allowing the car to pass through.

If a person has to exit the building, the authorized access card swipe at the Exit barrier will raise the Shutter & will keep it open for a pre-defined period before closing. The Wedge barrier operation will be as per the sequence mentioned above.

All Open Mode

The value of “3” is received by PLC from FSMS in the mode register, the system goes into “ALL OPEN”mode.In this mode both the incoming and outgoing wedge barrier shall go down and allow the vehicle traffic to move continuously and unconditionally.

Lock down Mode

The value of “4” is received by PLC from FSMS in the mode register, the system goes into ”LOCK DOWN” mode. In this mode both the incoming and outgoing wedge barrier shall go “up” and will not allow the vehicle traffic to move.

Fire Mode

When the fire present signal is received by PLC as digital input, the system goes into “FIRE” mode. In this mode both the incoming and outgoing wedge barrier shall go down and allow the vehicle traffic to move continuously and unconditionally.

Page 7 of 287



To understand the complete operation of the above modes, please refer to the Work flow

diagram.

Start Up Procedure

The PLC control panel gets the power supply of 220VAC from the external feeder and the local control panel gets the power supply from the PLC panel. There is a Power ON indication lamp present in the local control panel.

The PLC panel and the local control panel shall be powered on one by one in the same order for energising the system.

The switch position shall be selected according to the MAN/AUTO requirement. The same shall be operated manually if the switch is in “MAN” position explained above.

In “AUTO” position the PLC shall issue command to the wedge respectively according to the field conditions and the mode selected as explained above.

In the event of any mishappening or in emergency conditions the “EMERGENCY PUSH BUTTON” provided in the front of the control panel shall be operated. The system shall remain in the as is condition as the power shall be removed.

The wedge shall remain in its last state due to the Hydraulic power pack holding on to its previous state. The power shall be restored to bring the wedge to either UP or DOWN condition. This shall be achieved by releasing the emergency stop push button.

The control panel drawings and the PLC panel drawings are provided in the attached annexure.

The PLC shall be accessed by the licensed version of the work bench software for PAC 8000 series. The procedure for accessing the program, modifications of the logic is provided in the attached annexure.

Troubleshooting

Following steps shall be followed for trouble shooting

• “Power ON” Lamp shall indicate the presence of power supply to both PLC as well as local control panel. The Lamp shall be “ON” whenever the power is present.

• The physical status of the inputs shall be monitored and thus trouble shooted for the presence or absence of the signal using the licensed version of PAC 8000 work bench.

• The status of the relay signals in the control panel shall be monitored for the healthiness of the output signal by observing the red flag on the top part of the relay when in “ON” condition.

• All PLC hardware shall be monitored for OK LED glowing green signifying the healthiness of the individual cards.

1.5 Maintenance

• The individual PLC cards can be replaced by a new one when found faulty. The system shall be switched off before replacement of the cards. The CPU card being redundant shall be replaced in “ON” condition.

Page 8 of 287



• The Main MCB shall be switched off before attending to any power related maintenance. All PLC cards are operating at 24VDC. There are two power 24VDC supplies which are provided for the system card and hence the same can be replaced on line without disturbing the system operation with a suitable replacement. All PLC IO cards are online replaceable with the same model of cards.

• There is no need to change the configuration or reload the configuration or program to PLC system when replacement of system cards or Input/Output cards is done.

• The system shall be periodically cleaned and the panel shall be maintained dust free for enhancing the life of operation. The cleaning shall however be done only with complete Power OFF condition. The period of this activity shall be every six months.

1.6 Disposal Instructions

• The parts and components of the system when found faulty shall be replaced by a similar model and the defective one shall be treated as an electronic waste. The disposal procedures shall be for the electronic waste.

1.7 Manufacturers

• The main component of this system is PLC which is manufactured by GE Intelligent platforms, (GE IP). The details of the manufacturer shall be obtained at www.ge-ip.com and the technical documentation including the support can be obtained at www.support.ge-ip.com. The local contact representative for this project is

NILE AUTOMATION SYSTEMS ARABIA,

Ras-Al-Khaimah Free Zone,

PO BOX 16111

Ras-Al-Khaimah,

UAE

Contact Email: [email protected]

[email protected]

Mobile Numbers: 00973 36424320 (Muralidhar)

00973 36424904 (Gautham Shetty)

UAE Number 00971 552522607

1.8 Emergency Contact Information The contact information is same as above

Page 9 of 287



1.9 As-Built drawing Index

Attached as per annexure

1.10 Manufacturer's literature Attached as per annexure.

ANNEXURES:-

1) PLC panel Drawings 2) Local Control Panel Drawings 3) Workbench Starting Guide 4) PAC 8000 series catalogues 5) PAC 8000 Series Manuals 6) Operating MODES Workflow diagram

Page 10 of 287

Page 11 of 287

Page 12 of 287

Page 13 of 287

Page 14 of 287

Page 15 of 287

Page 16 of 287

Page 17 of 287

Page 18 of 287

Page 19 of 287

Page 20 of 287

Page 21 of 287

Page 22 of 287

Page 23 of 287

PDF created with pdfFactory Pro trial version www.pdffactory.comPage 24 of 287

http://www.pdffactory.com











GE Fanuc Intelligent Platforms

8000 Process I/O

Page 30 of 287

8000 I/O

GE Fanuc Intelligent Platforms, through our

acquisition of MTL Open System Technologies

(MOST), delivers powerful and comprehensive

I/O solutions for the harshest environments.

8000 Process I/O is recognized around the

world as a leading product for use in process

environments where extreme temperatures,

corrosion, shock and vibration are present.

It thrives in the heat of the Arabian Desert

and the arctic cold of Siberian oil fields and

in atmospheres that are so corrosive that

ordinary I/O cannot survive. The world’s

largest manufacturing companies rely on

us to protect their businesses and their

personnel because quality and reliability

are beyond question.

We’re supplying the intrinsically safe version

of the I/O to plants around the world where

explosive gases are present. The “intrinsic

safety” technique reduces the chance of

ignition by restricting the energy available

in high-risk areas, making it an extremely

cost-effective and reliable method of

preventing explosions.

For field-mounting I/O in the harsh and

hazardous process industry, GE Fanuc

Intelligent Platforms is the safe choice.

The safe choice for Process I/O

Benefits

Designed by experienced process engineers

specifically for process applications, 8000

I/O is simple to use—delivering cost savings

and value:

Minimum cost field mounting8000 I/O takes the place of the terminal

blocks in field termination cabinets; sensors

and actuators connect directly to its

terminals. Replacing the multi-core cable to

the control room with a single or redundant

twisted pair or fiber optic cable reduces the

installation cost dramatically. These savings

can only be achieved by field mounting,

which the rugged 8000 I/O offers.

Scalable8000 I/O is ideal for any size job from eight

I/O points upwards. It is compatible with all

controllers, from PLC and PC-based systems

right up to large DCS installations.

Low cost of ownership• Hot swap modules without shutdown

• Automatic addressing – remove and

replace I/O without re-programming

• Field wiring terminates directly onto

I/O field terminals – no external

terminals required

GE Fanuc Intelligent Platforms’ rugged, reliable 8000 Process I/O, with its optional intrinsic safety, provides a cost-effective and space-saving solution that eliminates the need for external intrinsic safety barriers. We can help you address your most demanding process control applications—all while helping you gain a sustainable advan-tage for future growth.

Page 31 of 287

Engineers now have the freedom to mount

I/O in the field for increased savings without

sacrificing reliability.

8000 I/O

Using field mounted I/O and an open network

reduces the cabling cost significantly and yet

gives access to the diagnostic data you need.

The 8000 I/O system solves all of the practical

problems so you can install an I/O bus on your

plant today.

What is the 8000 I/O system?It is a field mounting I/O system that replaces

field termination cabinets. It allows a group

of field devices of any type to be connected

to a single network node. The I/O nodes can

then be connected together to build a fast,

powerful and open I/O system.

Will it be expensive?No, instead of adding a network bus con-

nection for every switch and thermocouple,

groups of I/O devices can be connected

to the bus at a single point—sharing the

cost of a bus interface across a number

of I/O points.

How does field mounting save money?• Cable and conduit installation costs are cut

• I/O cabinets are not needed in the

control room

• Control rooms can be smaller

• Designs are standard so design costs

are low

• Fewer cables mean simple commissioning

and maintenance

Can’t any I/O system be field mounted?No. Standard PLC or DCS I/O is designed for

control room use, not for extreme tempera-

tures, corrosive and explosive gases, shock

and vibration that 8000 I/O thrives on. In

many applications, it is the only way of field

mounting I/O.

Field mounting I/O

Page 32 of 287

8000 I/O

Rugged, reliable I/O

8000 I/O is designed to address your process

needs, connecting as few as eight or as

many as 1024 I/O points to each node. You

can distribute the 8000 I/O nodes to remote

locations in large applications, where the size

is limited only by the network protocol you

choose. It’s effective across various industrial

process applications, including:

Oil and gas

8000 I/O is designed for the most remote

places where oil and gas are found. Its -40°C

to +70°C (-40°F to 160°F) operating tempera-

ture range means that it can be mounted

outdoors on the plant anywhere in the world.

System availability in these conditions can be

increased further by using redundant com-

munications modules, power supplies and

network cables. Also, intrinsic safety provides

great cost savings because the protection

components are designed into the module, so

no external barriers or isolators are needed.

The versatility and tough design

of 8000 I/O make it ideal for your

process I/O needs.

Chemical and petro- chemical processing

Chemical and hydrocarbon processing

plants create corrosive flammable gases

so field mounted I/O needs to be hazardous-

area capable as well as rugged. 8000 I/O

is certified for use in hazardous areas all

over the world. The modules are tropical-

ised to meet stringent ISA corrosion

resistance requirements.

Natural gas pipelines

When I/O is installed in remote locations, it

needs to be reliable and simple to maintain.

8000 I/O modules can be hot-swapped on

a live system. The configuration is backed

up locally so no re-configuration is neces-

sary, even if several modules are removed

and replaced at the same time.

Water and waste

Distributed field mounting makes 8000 I/O

ideal for use in the water industry where

I/O is needed in groups around each part

of the process. Its wide temperature range

means that I/O cabinets do not need heating.

Page 33 of 287

Zone 2 locations in Europe. These give

the highest possible savings in many

field-mounted environments.

Affordable intrinsic safety Our expertise is built into the front end

of IS I/O modules for direct connection to

hazardous area field wiring. This means no

external barriers or isolators, no additional

wiring and no extra cost. All you pay for is

the integrated IS I/O module.

De facto standard for Process I/O

8000 Process I/O has become the de facto

I/O standard for major automation suppliers.

It is the standard platform for several major

DCS systems, providing the I/O solution for

both safe area and hazardous area I/O needs

in their systems. Several programmable

controller vendors are using 8000 Process

I/O for their applications in harsh process

environments. You can be confident with

8000 Process I/O in your application.

A highly trusted I/O supplier

GE Fanuc Intelligent Platforms is an ISO

9001 company and a leading I/O supplier

for safety critical applications—approved

by dozens of authorities all over the

world—setting the industry standard for

quality, reliability and safety. In addition, you

can leverage our in-depth process industry

experience for your business success.

Pulp and paper

High temperature and humidity make paper

plants feel like a tropical jungle. 8000 I/O is

right at home in this atmosphere and is even

immune to the corrosive chemicals.

Hazardous area applications

8000 I/O is designed for use in the harshest

environments anywhere, but what about

areas where flammable gases are present?

As you would expect, 8000 I/O has the

widest range of hazardous area options.

Division 2/Zone 2 approvals8000 I/O is approved by Factory Mutual

and CSA for Class I, Division 2 applications

in the USA and Canada, respectively,

and is ATEX-approved for mounting in FOr MOrE InFOrMAtIOn AbOut HOW 8000 PrOCESS I/O CAn DELIvEr rESuLtS FOr yOur buSInESS, vISIt WWW.GEFAnuC.COM/8000

Page 34 of 287

The complete system

bus Interface Modules (bIMs)• Interfaces with up to 64 sixteen-channel modules• Modbus TCP, Modbus serial and Profibus communication

protocols supported• Redundant BIMs available for some protocols• On-line configuration and reconfiguration

I/O Modules• Wide range of I/O for virtually any process signal,

including HART® Smart analog, thermocouple, RTD, potentiometer, high-speed counter, frequency and quadrature

• Suitable for safe-area, non-incendive and intrinsically safe applications

• Remote configuration and interrogation of smart devices

• Packing density: 3-6mm per channel• Live “hot swapping” • Keying stops modules from being inserted in the

wrong position• Isolation between I/O bus and field wiring• Diagnostic services for each channel

The 8000 Process I/O, with its integral intrinsic safety, provides a cost-effective and space-saving solution that eliminates the need for external intrinsic safety barriers.

Page 35 of 287

Power Supplies (not shown)• AC power or 24V dc input versions• Supplies power for I/O and controllers• Redundant power supply options

Carriers• Tough polycarbonate base – protects against shock

and vibration• Choice of four module, eight module and Node

Services versions• Cable ground and shield terminals along front edge• Reliable – no active components – so there is

nothing to fail• Replacement modules are configured automatically,

so maintenance is simplicity itself

Field terminals• Unique, removable terminals for fast wiring and

field replacement• Optional fuses and disconnects – no interposing

terminals required• Direct termination for field wiring• Field power routed to terminals – no daisy chaining

at the field terminals• Integral tagging system

Page 36 of 287

02.09 GFA-1152A

©2009 GE Fanuc Intelligent Platforms, Inc. All Rights Reserved. *Trademark of GE Fanuc Intelligent Platforms, Inc. All other brands or names are property of their respective holders.

GE Fanuc Intelligent PlatformsInformation Center

Headquarters:1 800 GEFANUC1 800 322 36161 434 978 5100

Global Regional phone numbersare available on our web sitewww.gefanuc.com

Additional resources

For more information, please visit the GE Fanuc Intelligent Platforms web site at:

www.gefanuc.com

Proficy Software Modules

Plant Performance and Execution6 Proficy Workflow6 Proficy Plant Applications – Efficiency6 Proficy Plant Applications – Production6 Proficy DataMart6 Proficy Tracker 6 Proficy Machine Tool Efficiency

Integrated Quality6 Proficy Plant Applications – Quality6 Proficy Non Conformance Reporting6 Proficy Shop Floor SPC6 Proficy RX™

real-time Information Portal6 Proficy Real-Time Information Portal

Process Solutions

6 Proficy Process Systems*

6 Proficy Batch Execution6 Proficy Plant Applications – Batch Analysis6 PACSystems* RX3i and RX7i6 PAC8000 Controllers 6 PAC8000 SafetyNet 6 8000 Process I/O

Plant Data repository6 Proficy Historian

Asset Management6 Proficy Remote Monitoring and Diagnostic6 Proficy Change Management6 Proficy Maintenance Gateway*

HMI / SCADA6 Proficy HMI/SCADA – iFIX*

6 Proficy HMI/SCADA – CIMPLICITY*

6 Proficy View – Machine Edition

Programming & Control6 Proficy Logic Developer6 Proficy Motion Developer – Machine Edition

GE Fanuc Support & Services

6 GlobalCare* Support6 Professional Services6 Training

Page 37 of 287

Juine 2004

8000-2/x Series Modular I/O

Overview

I/O Modules

I/O Modules - Overview

2/2 ModulesAnalog InputAnalog OutputDiscrete InputDiscrete OutputPulse Input

2/1 ModulesAnalog InputAnalog OutputDiscrete InputDiscrete OutputPulse Input

Field Terminals

2/2 and 2/1 Terminals

Carriers, Extenders, Cables

2/2 Carriers2/2 Extenders2/2 Cables

2/1 Carriers2/1 Extenders2/1 Cables

Power Supplies

DC/DC Power supplies - 2/2 and 2/1AC/DC Power supplies - 2/2

Railbus Isolator

Bus Interface Modules

Modbus BIMProfibus-DP BIMConfigurator SoftwareNode Services ModuleHart Interface Module

System Specification

System specificationCable parameters and approvalsThermocouple characterisation

8000 - 2/2 componentsUse this option for general purpose or non-hazardous applications, or where theequipment and/or field wiring has to bemounted in Zone 2 or Division 2 hazardousareas. Select I/O modules and their fieldterminals followed by module carriers, Businterface modules and power supply options.

8000 - 2/1 componentsUse this option for Zone 2 or Division 2 hazardous area mounting where the fieldwiring must connect into Zone 1, Zone 0 orDivision 1 hazardous areas. The moduleshave intrinsic safety (IS) interfaces built in.Select I/O modules and their appropriate ISfield terminals followed by module carriers,Bus interface modules and power supplyoptions.

Page 38 of 287

208002302

Image

EUROPE (EMEA) Tel: +44 (0)1582 723633 Fax: +44 (0)1582 422283AMERICAS Tel: +1 603 926 0090 Fax: +1 603 926 1899ASIA PACIFIC Tel: +65 487 7887 Fax: +65 487 7997E-mail: [email protected] Web site: www.mtl-inst.com

Juine 2004

General

8000 I/O is a completely

modular I/O solution for both

general purpose and hazardous

area applications. Based upon a

carrier system that supports a

range of modules, it offers a wide

variety of I/O functions, including

AC mains and intrinsic safety

signals - even within the same

node. It has an “open”

architecture that allows

communication with a variety of

different field-buses by selecting

the appropriate type of Bus

Interface Module (BIM).

8000-2/x Series - Overview

1

5

23

4I/O ModulesI/O modulestransfer signals toand from fieldinstruments. Inputmodules receive signalsfrom transmitters and sensorsand convert them into a digital form forpresentation to the BIM. Output modulesreceive commands from the BIM andtransfer them to actuators. A wide range ofmodules is available, including types forlow-level instrumentation, AC mains andintrinsically safe signals. I/O modulestypically have 4, 8 or 16 field channels.

Field terminalsField terminals provide the interfacebetween the I/O modules and the fieldwiring. They include fusing and loop-disconnect as options. A mechanical keyingsystem prevents an I/O module from beingconnected to the wrong type of field terminal.

Field terminals mount onto the module carrier, one to each I/O module. They areclamped firmly by the I/O module to forman electrical and mechanical assembly of high integrity. They may be replaced in service without removing carriers or disturbing the operation of other modules.

CarriersCarriers form 8000's physical and electrical backbone by providing a mounting onto a flat panel or T- or G-sectionDIN rail. They support and interconnect theBIM, power supplies, I/O modules and fieldterminals, and carry the address, data andpower lines of the internal Railbus. They provide a termination points for the LANand field wiring cable screens and can alsodistribute bussed field power to the I/Omodules.

I/O module carriers are available to support four or eight I/O modules.

Power suppliesGood power management lies at the heartof a true distributed I/O system. 8000power supplies accept locally availableunregulated power and provide a regulatedsupply for the BIM and I/O modules. Supply redundancy is supported.

BusInterfaceModule (BIM)The BIM provides a serial data connectionto a host controller, which could be a distributed control system (DCS), aprogrammable logic controller (PLC), or aPC running a soft control package. A choiceof BIMs allows you to accommodate themost popular fieldbus protocols. The BIMalso uses a fast internal bus to pass data to,and obtain data from, the I/O modules.Only one BIM is required at each node tocontrol up to 32 I/O modules.

“HART-ability”The use of ‘smart’ instruments on processplants is growing but this investment is notalways fully exploited. Whether it is for anew installation, or the upgrade of an existing one, we have solutions that providethe connections between the HART fieldinstruments, the control systems and theprocess automation maintenance software.

Specifically, the 8000 Process I/O system has been designed to be transparentto HART signals, thus allowing the host controlsoftware and any HART field instruments tocommunicate directly with each other.

In addition, 8000’s HART connection systemprovides on-line access from a PC to theHART field devices for monitoring deviceperformance. HART devices may be selectedfor regular status monitoring and alerts canbe issued if the status changes. The benefitsfrom this approach are:

Reduced commissioning time and cost

Reduced process downtime through status monitoring

Lower loop maintenance costs by usingfield device diagnostics

Consult a GE Fanuc representative for furtherdetails.

System specificationSee end of section.

1

2

3

4

5

Page 39 of 287

208002302

Image


Juine 2004

General

8000 is a completely

modular I/O solution for both

general purpose and hazardous

area applications. Based upon a

carrier system that supports a

range of modules, it offers a wide

variety of I/O functions, including

AC mains and intrinsic safety

signals - even within the same

node. It has an “open”

architecture that allows

communication with a variety of

different field-buses by selecting

the appropriate type of Bus

Interface Module (BIM).


1

5

23

4I/O ModulesI/O modulestransfer signals toand from fieldinstruments. Inputmodules receive signalsfrom transmitters and sensorsand convert them into a digital form forpresentation to the BIM. Output modulesreceive commands from the BIM andtransfer them to actuators. A wide range ofmodules is available, including types forlow-level instrumentation, AC mains andintrinsically safe signals. I/O modulestypically have 4, 8 or 16 field channels.

Field terminalsField terminals provide the interfacebetween the I/O modules and the fieldwiring. They include fusing and loop-disconnect as options. A mechanical keyingsystem prevents an I/O module from beingconnected to the wrong type of field terminal.

Field terminals mount onto the module carrier, one to each I/O module. They areclamped firmly by the I/O module to forman electrical and mechanical assembly of high integrity. They may be replaced in service without removing carriers or disturbing the operation of other modules.

CarriersCarriers form 8000's physical and electrical backbone by providing a mounting onto a flat panel or T- or G-sectionDIN rail. They support and interconnect theBIM, power supplies, I/O modules and fieldterminals, and carry the address, data andpower lines of the internal Railbus. They provide a termination points for the LANand field wiring cable screens and can alsodistribute bussed field power to the I/Omodules.

I/O module carriers are available to support four or eight I/O modules.

Power suppliesGood power management lies at the heartof a true distributed I/O system. 8000power supplies accept locally availableunregulated power and provide a regulatedsupply for the BIM and I/O modules. Supply redundancy is supported.

BusInterfaceModule (BIM)The BIM provides a serial data connectionto a host controller, which could be a distributed control system (DCS), aprogrammable logic controller (PLC), or aPC running a soft control package. A choiceof BIMs allows you to accommodate themost popular fieldbus protocols. The BIMalso uses a fast internal bus to pass data to,and obtain data from, the I/O modules.Only one BIM is required at each node tocontrol up to 32 I/O modules.

“HART-ability”The use of ‘smart’ instruments on processplants is growing but this investment is notalways fully exploited. Whether it is for anew installation, or the upgrade of an existing one, we have solutions that providethe connections between the HART fieldinstruments, the control systems and theprocess automation maintenance software.

Specifically, the 8000 Process I/O system has been designed to be transparentto HART signals, thus allowing the host controlsoftware and any HART field instruments tocommunicate directly with each other.

In addition, 8000’s HART connection systemprovides on-line access from a PC to theHART field devices for monitoring deviceperformance. HART devices may be selectedfor regular status monitoring and alerts canbe issued if the status changes. The benefitsfrom this approach are:

Reduced commissioning time and cost

Reduced process downtime through status monitoring

Lower loop maintenance costs by usingfield device diagnostics

Consult a GE Fanuc representative for furtherdetails.

System specificationSee end of section.

1

2

3

4

5

Page 40 of 287

208002302

Image


Juine 2004


8000 in your systemFigure 1 shows two possible methods forlinking the 8000 into a system. On theleft is a host controller system that uses fieldbus as the main distribution medium.On the right is a section of a typicalDCS/PLC information network, with anoperator station that uses a separate interface to the process fieldbus.

The number of 8000 nodes that can be accommodated depends upon theaddressing capability of the fieldbus in use. Each 8000 node can address 32I/O modules which, depending upon the number of channels per module, canprovide up to 512 I/O points at a singlenode! A node can consist of a mixture ofanalog and discrete modules and this givesmaximum flexibility to the system designer.Where supported by the fieldbus, full HARTpass-through is provided—the 8000appears “transparent”, allowing the hostcontroller to access the HART capabilities offield instruments.

Wide choice of fieldbusoptions8000 supports a number of popularfieldbus protocols: Modbus® (RTU mode),Profibus–DP, etc., and the range is growing.If your protocol is not mentioned then consult us. We are also interested in talking toOEM partners who want to develop theirown fieldbus variations. A software core hasbeen developed that simplifies the design ofalternative control interfaces for the system.

Redundancy options 8000 has been designed to increaseavailability and minimise downtime.Redundant LAN channels and power supplies can be specified as options toincrease system availability. Possibledowntime is further reduced by ensuring thatthe system components using active circuitrycan be removed and replaced quickly andeasily. Even the field terminals can bereplaced without interrupting the operationof adjacent I/O modules. Carriers have noactive circuitry and are unlikely to needreplacement.

System power suppliesThe system power supply at an 8000node converts the local DC supply to powerthe node and can also provide field powerfor I/O modules with low-level field circuits.Where heavy-current or AC mains circuitsare handled by the I/O modules, 8000’sinnovative Bussed Field Power scheme fordistributing field power avoids complexwiring at the field terminal and minimisesthe backplane/carrier wiring.

Fieldbus compatibledevice

DCS / PLC

8000

Process LAN/fieldbus

Host controller

Process LAN/fieldbus 8000node

Standard fieldbuscontroller interface

a)

b)

c)

Zone 2(and general purpose)Zone 1Zone 0

Division 1 Division 2

Hazardous area applicationsThe 8000 is a truly field mountable system even in areas where flammablegases are present. It is available in threeversions to suit different area classificationschemes:

a) Equipment and field wiring located ingeneral purpose areas, Class 1, Division2 hazardous locations or Zone 2hazardous areas.

b) Equipment mounted in general purposeareas, Class 1, Division 2 hazardous

locations or Zone 2 hazardous areas,with field wiring located in Division 1hazardous locations or Zone 0 hazardous areas.

c)8000-1/1 equipment mounted inZone 1 hazardous areas, with fieldwiring located in Zone 0 or Zone 1 hazardous areas.

Figure 2 illustrates the connection of fielddevices for these various options.

Figure 1 - 8000 in a system

Figure 2 - 8000 in hazardous areas

Page 41 of 287

208002302

Image


Juine 2004


8000 with general purpose field wiringMany industry applications do not presentan explosion risk from gas or dust hazards.In others, the environment may be classifiedas a Zone 2 or Division 2 hazardous area,where flammable material is expected tooccur only in abnormal conditions. For bothof these the 2/2 system provides effectivedistributed I/O for process control.8000 supports a full range of I/Omodule types covering inputs and outputs forboth analog and discrete circuits. The nodecan be mounted out on the plant in asuitable enclosure providing protectionagainst the environment. Figure 3 shows anode containing all the key components: aBus Interface Module, PSU modules(including a redundant one), I/O moduleson carriers and a pair of carrier-extenderslinked with an extension cable.

8000 with intrinsicsafety field wiringThe 8000 Process I/O System is capableof supporting I/O modules with intrinsicsafety (IS) field wiring, for connection to certified or ‘simple apparatus’ field devicesin Division 1 or Zone 0 hazardous areas(see Figure 4). A range of I/O module typeswith IS field circuits for industry-standard DI, DO, AI and AO applications issupported.

I/O modules with built-in protectionAll voltage and current-limiting componentsrequired for IS protection are incorporatedwithin the I/O module housings, so noexternal, add-on zener barriers or galvanicisolators are necessary. IS field terminals aredistinguished from other types by bluecolouring of the terminal housing. A uniqueand sophisticated mechanical keying mechanism prevents modules with differentprotection techniques from beinginterchanged, so that potentially explosive ordamaging conditions cannot occur.

Integrated power suppliesPower for IS I/O modules is derived fromintegrated, modular power supply units.Each power unit is capable of supplyingbetween eight and twenty I/O modules,depending on the I/O type and mix.Optional power supply redundancy is supported by means of an additional, redundant supply unit connected in an ‘n+1’arrangement. In applications with mixed ISand non-IS field wiring, the full facilities ofthe ‘Bussed Field Power’ regime are retainedfor the non-IS part of the system.

System powersuppl

ppy

Bus InterfaceModulelocal

18–36 V DCpower

Carrierextender

(LH)

(General purpose orZone 2/Div 2)

p pp p(General purpose orZone 2/Div 2)

p pp p

To maximum of 32I/O modules

Otional redundantsystem powersupply moduly pp

e

8-module carrier(General purpose or

Zone 2/Div 2)p pp p

4-module carrier(General purpose or

Zone 2/Div 2)p pp p

Carrierextender

(RH)Bussed Field Power

Bussed Field Power

D.C. power linkto otherp

extender

Carrier

(LH)

CarrierExtender

(RH)

Local18–36V dc

powerLocal

18–36V dcpower

I/O modulepower supply

Optional n+1redundant

ppI/O

module powersuppl

ppy

To maximum of32 I/O modules

DINrail

8-module carrier(IS field wiring)

[EEx ia ]

Local12 V dcpower

LANterminals

BIMCarrier

BusInterfaceModule

Railbus IsolatorModule and

Carrier

8-module carrier (IS field wiring) [EEx ia]

Local18–36V dc


[EEx ia ]

Extendercables

I/O modulepower supply

In nodes populated only with IS I/O modules, a separate system power supplymodule provides power for the Bus InterfaceModule and ‘node services’. Redundancy ofthis supply is also supported.

Figure 4 8000 node with IS field wiring

Figure 3 8000 node

Page 42 of 287

208002302

Image

EUROPE (EMEA) Tel: +44 (0)1582 723633 Fax: +44 (0)1582 422283AMERICAS Tel: +1 603 926 0090 Fax: +1 603 926 1899ASIA PACIFIC Tel: +65 487 7887 Fax: +65 487 7997Email: enquiry@mtlinst.com Web site: www.mtlinst.com

Juine 2004

80002/x Series Overview

Mixed I/O types within asingle nodeIS and nonIS field wiring types can also beincorporated within one 8000 node (seeFigure 5). In this arrangement, the two partsof the node are separated by a ‘RailbusIsolator’ module. The Railbus Isolatorprovides a section of internal communications bus (‘Railbus’) for the IS I/Omodules which is protected from invasion by damaging fault voltagesUniquely, a single 8000 node (under thecommand of one Bus Interface Module) canthen support a mixture of certified IS fielddevices, certified Division 2 or Zone 2 fielddevices and general purpose I/O, includingAC mains circuits. Only one Railbus Isolatoris used per 8000 node.

Related 8000 LiteratureAN8000System Specifier’s Guide Modular I/O

INM8000Installation Guide

Local18–36V

dc

I/O modulepower

Optional n+1redundant

ppI/O

module powersuppl

ppy

8module carrier(IS field wiring)

[EEx ia ]

Railbus Isolatormodule and

carrier

r(Safe area or Zone 2/Div 2 field

wiring)

Node services carrier(Safe area or Zone 2/Div 2 field

wiring)

4module carrier(IS field wiring)

[EEx ia ]

Bussed Field Power

Figure 5 8000 node with mixed IS and non IS field wiring

Page 43 of 287

208002302

Image

GeneralAll I/O modules are connected to

a high speed Bus Interface

Module (BIM) via a proprietary

bus system called ‘Railbus’ and

one BIM can control up to 32

modules.

The module carrier provides the

transmission medium for the

Railbus and, by plugging a

module onto a carrier,

connections are made between

the module and the bus. The

connectors on the carrier also

provide the power supply links to

the module and, when required,

power for the field wiring.


Aug 2005


Addressing of I/O modulesModules are addressed by the BIM in termsof their position, or slot, in the total chain of32 modules not by individual module types.As a result, a module can be removed andreplaced by another of its own type withoutthe need to ‘tell’ the BIM of the change.During configuration, the BIM is told thecharacteristics of each necessary moduleposition whether or not the module is presentat the time. Consequently, if a module isremoved for service replacement, theproperties of the ‘slot’ are still retained bythe BIM.

Important modesOutput failsafe modeOutput modules have the ability to assume afailsafe state. This can happen for two reasons.1) The BIM can force a module into a

failsafe state by issuing a specific command to it.

2) Modules have a configurable “timeout”parameter. This defines the maximumtime period of communication inactivitywith the BIM. If this period is exceededthe module adopts a failsafe state.

The different module types have their ownresponse to a failsafe command, and thoseresponses are described in the individualsections that follow.

Input fail valuesIn the event of failure of an input module, theBIM forces the reported value to apredefined state – low, high or hold lastvalue.This ensures that the host adopts a state consistent with safe operation of the plant.

Power-up/initialisation stateWhen powering-up a node it is essential forplant safety that the state of each of the outputs is known. While the BIM isinitialising, the I/O modules are held in thepower-up state (see following pages). AfterBIM initialisation and before establishingcommunication with the host, the outputs areset to predefined “initialisation” states. This“safe-state” can be defined by the user foreach output channel.

Non-volatile configurationmemoryThe configuration information for all I/Omodules in a node is stored in the BIM innon-volatile memory (NVM). When amodule is replaced, when the node ispowered up or following a reset, the BIMwill download the stored configurationinformation to the relevant I/O modules.

Visual indicatorsLEDs are provided on each module to indicatePower, Fault and channel Status information.These are based on the NAMUR NE44specification for LED indicators.The Power and Fault indicators are commonto all I/O modules and their states areshown in the following tables.

Module ‘Fault’ LED (red)

BFP = Bussed Field Power of 2/2 modules

Module ‘Power’ LED (green)

Module ‘Status’ LED (yellow)The channel “Status” indicators have differentmeanings according to the module type andare described in the individual module sections.

Important noteIf, when using the 8502 Profibus BIM, thenode is configured over Profibus, a reducedset of configuration parameters is available.In this case, the module specifications shouldbe read in conjunction with the Profibus BIMinstruction manual INM8502 which explainsthe configuration options.

Alternatively, if the 8455 ConfiguratorSoftware is used to configure a Profibusnode, a fully detailed range of moduleconfiguration parameters is available.

GSD files are available for either of theabove options.

On Æ FailsafeÆ A/D error on AIÆ BFP failure on 2/2 AI

Off Normal

Flashing Initialisation error

On Power OK

Off Power failure

Page 44 of 287

208002302

Image


June 2004

Default/Power-up conditionsThese modules use the following valueswhen they power up.Module mode

Normal (not “failsafe”)Active/inactive

All channels power up in the active state.Alarms

All alarms are made inactive by having their values set to high or low extremes, as appropriate. Dead Zone

0 (i.e. all changes of A/D data arereported for an active channel)

Software FilteringDisabled.PassthroughPassthrough messages to HART instrumentsare always allowed.

Visual indicatorsChannel “Status” LED (yellow)

An error – i.e. a flashing LED – could be asa result of any of the following conditions:a) a loss of HART signal, b) an error in the A/D converter, c) a NAMUR alarm or d) a Hi (-Hi) or Low (-Low) alarm.

Analog Input Modules - 4-20mA

GeneralThe 4–20 mA AI modules provide digitiseddata and status information from 4–20 mAcurrent loop sensors.

HART® capabilityAI modules “with HART” can obtain information from HART instruments of protocol revision 5.0 or later. Each channelcan communicate with a single HART instrument. HART universal command 3 isused to gather up to 4 dynamic variablesand status from each HART instrument. Thisprovides more process information to thecontrol system from each device. Greateraccuracy can also be achieved by eliminating A/D and D/A errors.In addition, HART pass-through may be usedfor device configuration, calibration andadvanced diagnostics.

Input samplingThe AI modules have eight user-channels thatare sampled every 27 ms (2/2) or 33 ms(2/1).

Data formatThe input signal is stored as a 16-bitunsigned value. In this range 0 is equivalentto 0mA and 65,535 is equivalent to 25mA.Any digital HART data is stored in its original IEEE754 floating point format.

FilteringThe Analog Input modules use a first-ordersoftware filter that provides 12 dB attenuation atthe Nyquist frequency of the algorithm. Thefilter supports a set of options that can bematched with control algorithm execution rates.

Input alarmsFour configurable alarm levels are providedfor each channel—two high and two low(see figure below). When an input valueexceeds an alarm limit a flag is set and theBIM gets a new alarm status.

Alarm deadbandThe Alarm Deadband prevents the alarmfrom tripping on and off because of systemnoise. It can be configured for each channeland is always set on the ‘inner’ side of thealarm limit to be, typically, greater than thesystem noise in the plant. If an alarm is activated, it will remain until the input movesthe full extent of the deadband towards a“safer” value.The Hi-Hi and Lo-Lo alarms support theNAMUR recommendations, i.e. if the alarm

limit is set less than 3.6 mA (Lo-Lo), orgreater than 21.0 mA (Hi-Hi), the alarmsmust be active for 4 seconds before thealarm is set. The Deadband does not applyto NAMUR alarms. If the alarm limits are setat values between the NAMUR limits, thealarms function normally.

Dead zoneEach channel has a definable "dead zone".This is to reduce the need for the module toreport to the BIM every minor change ininput value. If the input value differs by theamount defined by the Dead Zone, or more,then the new value is reported, otherwise itis not. This reduces traffic on the internal buswhich improves the system response time. Ifthe Dead Zone value is set to zero (thedefault), then every input value read will seta 'New Data' flag, and be reported.

Module operating statesNormal/Failsafe modeThe AI modules support failsafe mode asdefined in the earlier I/O module introductorysection. When not in failsafe the moduleadopts Normal mode.

Channel Active/InactiveA channel can be made active or inactiveindividually. When a channel is made inactive inputs will not be processed.

HART ® is a registered trademark of the HART Communications Foundation.

MonitoredChannel ValueVV

Hi Alarm cleared

Deadbands

Lo Alarm limit

Lo Lo Alarm limit

Hi Alarm limit

Hi Hi Alarm limit

Hi Hi NAMUR Alarm cleared

Time

InputValue

ppVV

Hi Alarm set Hi Hi Alarm cleared

Hi Hi Alarm setHi Hi NAMUR Alarm set (4s delay)

Lo Alarm set

Lo Alarm cleared

Lo Lo Alarm cleared

Lo Lo Alarm setLo Lo NAMUR Alarm set (4s delay) Lo Lo NAMUR Alarm cleared

On Sensor loop OK

Off Open circuit sensor and channel inactive

Flashing Open circuit sensor and channel activeOR Error condition

Page 45 of 287

208002302

Image


June 2004

Module operating statesNormal/Failsafe modeThe THC and RTD modules support failsafemode as defined in the earlier I/O moduleintroductory section. When not in failsafe themodule adopts Normal mode.


Power-up conditionsThe module uses the following values when itpowers up.Module mode



All alarms are made inactive by having their values set to high or low extremes, as appropriate. Dead zone


Software filteringDisabled

Channel typeType K thermocouple or 3-wire RTD - Pt100

O/C sensorOff

Visual indicatorsChannel “status” LED (yellow)

On Sensor loop OK



Analog Input Modules - THC and RTD

GeneralThese modules provide digitised data andstatus information of analog measurementsfrom thermocouples, mV sources, RTDs andresistance sources.Thermocouple modules provide four or eightchannels for monitoring input signals fromthermocouples or mV sources. The functionof the module is set up during configuration. Cold junction compensationfor thermocouple applications is provided bymeans of a sensor in the field terminal. Onlythe recommended field terminals can beused with these modules.RTD modules provide four or eight channelsfor monitoring input signals from RTD orresistance sources. The function of the module is set up during configuration. TheRTD can be 2-, 3- or 4-wire type. Only therecommended field terminals can be usedwith these modules.

Input samplingThermocouple modules sample at intervalsof 60 ms per channel. In addition, the module has cold junction temperaturecompensation that is refreshed every 1.8 seconds for 4-channel modules and every2.4 seconds for 8-channel modules. Thesampling technique for the RTD module issimilar where samples of the voltage across,and the current through, the RTD aremeasured at intervals of 60 ms per channel.Compensation methods reject the effect ofresistance in the cable conductors for 3-wireand 4-wire RTD/Resistance.

Data formatThe 8105/6 4-channel modules store dataas 15-bit plus sign integers (–32768 to+32768). The 8205/6 8-channel modulesstore data as 16-bit unsigned integers (0 to65535).

FilteringAn Infinite Impulse Response (IIR) filter isused on the input data before it reaches the A/D converter. Depending upon the coefficients selected, the output from the filter will be:a) the input value (filter OFF)

b) an average of the last two readings (filter ON - setting 1)

c) a running average of readings (filter ON- setting 2)

The coefficients can be selected individuallyfor each channel.

Input alarmsThe modules provide two configurable alarmlevels for each channel—a high limit and alow one. See figure.When an input value exceeds an alarm limitthe appropriate alarm bit (high or low) is setin the channel status byte. In addition, the“new data” signal is set to allow the controller to collect the new alarm statusinformation and the affected channel LEDwill flash.

Alarm deadbandThe alarm deadband (not shown on thediagram) is fixed at 1%.


Open sensor detectionWhen configured to do so, the modules willdetect an open circuit sensor and report itwithin 10 seconds. When this occurs a statusbit is set in the module and the affectedchannel LED flashes. The detection optionsfor the two module types are configurable asfollows:THC and mV

Off, drive upscale or drive downscaleRTD and resistance

Off or drive upscaleThese choices can be made for each channel.


Time

InputValue

ppVV

Lo Alarm limit

Lo Alarm set Lo Alarm cleared

Hi Alarm limit

Hi Alarm set Hi Alarm cleared

Page 46 of 287

208002302

Image


June 2004

1) Use configured failsafe values

In this (default) mode, the module forces theoutput to a predefined percentage value.The default value is 0%.

2) Hold last value

In this mode the channel holds the last valueit output.When not in failsafe the module adoptsNormal mode.

Channel Active/InactiveEach channel can be made active or inactive individually. When a channel ismade inactive the output is disabled, i.e. de-energised.When a channel is made Active again theoutput is driven based upon the current configuration.

Default/Power-up conditionsThe module uses predefined values when itpowers up. The following parameters summarise the state of the module when itpowers up.Module mode:

Normal (not “failsafe”)Active/inactive:

All channels power up in the Inactive state.

Visual indicatorChannel “Status” LED (yellow)

On the AO modules the yellow “Status” LEDreacts in the following way to module conditions.An error condition – i.e. a flashing LED –could be as the result of the loss of the HARTcommunications signal.

On Field circuit OK

Off Open circuit field loop and channel inactive

Flashing Open circuit field loop and channel activeOR Error condition

Analog Output Modules - 4-20mA

GeneralThe 4–20 mA AO modules use a single D/Aconverter in a sample-and-hold configuration to drive each of the outputchannels. The processor sets the currentvalue for each of the active channels onceevery 20 ms. Any requested output valuesbelow 1mA are clamped to 1mA to ensurethat the open-loop detection mechanism isalways operable. To verify that active output channels havecurrent flowing to the field, the processorreads a hardware signal every time an output is written to the D/A converter. If thesignal indicates “no current flowing”, i.e. < 1 mA, for 50 consecutive scans (i.e. onesecond), an Open-Loop Detection failure isset for that channel.

HART® capabilityAO modules “with HART” are compatiblewith all HART devices of protocol revision5.0 or later. Each channel can communicatewith a single HART instrument and supports HART communication with the widerange of HART valve positioners nowavailable. HART universal command 3 canbe used to gather up to 4 dynamic HARTvariables such as valve position, air pressure, etc., together with HART statusvariables. These are scanned by the BIMand may be communicated over the LAN foreasy integration into the control system.In addition, HART pass-through may be usedfor device configuration, calibration andadvanced diagnostics.

Data formatThe output data has a resolution of 12 bitsbut is stored as a 16-bit unsigned value. Inthis range 0 is equivalent to 0mA and65,535 is equivalent to 25mA.

Module operating statesFailsafe modeThe module supports failsafe mode asdefined in the earlier I/O module introductory section. When put in failsafemode the output can be made to adopt oneof the following options.


Page 47 of 287

208002302

Image


June 2004

Discrete Input Modules

GeneralDI modules can accept up to 8 or 16 discrete inputs, depending upon moduletype, from dry contacts, NAMUR standardproximity detectors, or switched voltages.The source voltage for field switching can beprovided through the module or from anindependent supply out in the field.In operation, the input voltage is comparedagainst a threshold voltage to create a ‘true’or ‘false’ condition. If the inputs are fromZone 2/ Zone 1 or Zone 0 hazardousareas, the appropriate (2/1) module provides certified isolation for these signals.A pulse counter is also included which cancount the number of input pulses for each of thechannels.

Input filterAn input filter can be set individually foreach channel to introduce a delay periodthat allows the input to settle to a stablevalue.When switched off, the bandwidth of the DIinput is 250 Hz (100 Hz for 2/1 modules).The timeout filter can introduce a timeoutdelay of between 2 and 512 ms in 2 mssteps for 2/2 modules and between 3 and512 ms in 3 ms steps for 2/1 modules.Alternatively, preset values of “Fast” (22 ms)or “Slow” (258 ms) may be used.

LatchAny channel input can be configured to be“real time” or latched. If the latch feature isenabled, the polarity can also be set so thatan input signal that goes: high will be held high low will be held lowuntil the latch is released by a commandfrom the controller. All channels are latchedindependently and can be cleared

simultaneously, or independently, by a Write instruction to the module’s latch resetregister. If controlled by a BIM this will occurautomatically in 2 to 3 seconds.

Line fault detection (2/1 only)When enabled, this will cause a flag to beset to indicate a short or open circuit fault.

Low-frequency pulse counterThe DI modules contain a continuously running 16-bit pulse counter that counts eachlow-frequency pulse received on the input.The maximum pulse rate, with the timeoutfilter switched off, depends upon the moduleselected; consult the individual data sheetsfor details. With the filter active, themaximum pulse rate will be determined bythe timeout period used. In order to start aparticular count the counter must be reset tozero by a host instruction. When the counteroverflows (i.e. > 65,536 counts) it willrestart from zero.

Module operating states“Failsafe” modeThe module supports failsafe mode asdefined in the earlier I/O module introductory section.

Channel Active/InactiveEach channel can be made active or inactive individually. When a channel ismade inactive: inputs are not processed—i.e. the last

input value is held and not refreshed

channel events are not generated

the counter is not incremented

Power-up conditionsOn power-up, or if a reset is executed, theconfiguration will automatically adopt predefined states:Module mode:

Normal (not “failsafe”)Channel types:

All latches and filters are offActive/Inactive:

All channels power-up in the Active state

Visual indicators

Channel “Status” LED (yellow)On the DI modules the yellow “Status” LEDreacts in the following way to module conditions.Note: the LED may appear to flash when the inputgoes high and low repeatedly.

On Channel input “high” or latched

Off Channel input “low”

Flashing Line fault detect (2/1 only)

Page 48 of 287

208002302

Image


June 2004

Discrete Output Modules

GeneralDO modules can provide up to 4 or 8 discreteoutputs, depending upon module type. Linefault detection is also provided on the 2/1 modules for both open- and short-circuitconditions.

Output ModeThe DO module outputs may be configuredfor one of three different types of output: Discrete Single pulse Continuous pulse

DiscreteThe Bus Interface Module (BIM) signals anON or OFF condition on demand.

Singe Pulse(See Notes 1 & 2)This is an individual “single-shot” action, creating a single ON pulse of specifiedduration that occurs at a definable time. Thepulse on-time can be varied between 2ms and130s in increments of 2ms. If a new ONcommand (i.e. trigger) is given during the ONperiod the pulse will restart. If a new pulsewidth is supplied during the ON period, itwill not take effect until the next ON period.A pulse can experience a small amount oftime dither that depends upon the amount ofRailbus activity. This can be ± 1% of thepulse width or ± 3.5 ms, whichever is thelonger.

Continuous Pulse(see Notes 2, 3 & 4)This type of output provides a continuouspulse train that is defined by the pulse on-time, and the pulse period (the time betweenthe start of each ON time). The pulse periodis configurable to any value between 4 msand 130,000 ms in 2 ms steps. The pulseon-time is the same as for the momentaryaction described above. The on-time mustnot exceed the setting for the pulse period.(See also the above note regarding ACmodules.)Pulses can experience a small amount oftime dither that depends upon the amount ofRailbus activity. This can be ± 1% of thepulse period, or ± 3.5 ms, whichever is thelonger.Continuous pulse operation has two distinctmodes—static and dynamic. When in staticmode, the pulse parameters are clearedfrom memory when the channel is madeinactive; in dynamic mode the values areretained for use when the channel is madeactive once again.

Line Fault detection (2/1 only)When enabled, this will cause a flag to beset to indicate a short or open circuit faulteven when channel output is in OFF state.

Module operating statesFailsafe modeThe module supports failsafe mode asdefined in the earlier I/O moduleintroductory section, with the following two additions:

1) Channel using “Configured failsafe values”

In this mode, the module will force the outputs to predefined levels— defined on aper channel basis. On entering “failsafe”:

a) If channel is in Static mode of operation:

Pulse mode is disabled and the channelis configured as a latched output and isdriven to its failsafe value.

b) If channel is in Dynamic mode of operation:

If in single pulse (momentary) mode, theconfiguration is not cleared, but theoutput is driven to its failsafe value.

On leaving failsafe:

Channel will adopt the mode definedbelow for a channel going from inactive to active state

2) Channel using “Hold last value”

If the module goes into failsafe during a single pulse, it is allowed to complete thepulse before adopting the failsafe state. Alatched (discrete) output will remain at itscurrent value.

Channel Active/ Inactive Each channel can be made active or inactive individually. When a channel is made inactive the outputis turned OFF (i.e. de-energised).When a channel changes from inactive toactive the following situations apply:a) If channel is in Static mode of operation:

It becomes a latched output and willremain so until reconfigured by the BIM.


The channel will resume operation withits previous configuration and output.


Normal (not failsafe)Channel types

All channels are configured as Discrete outputs

Active/Inactive All channels power-up in the Inactivestate

Line fault detection (2/1 only)Disabled on all channels


On the DO modules the yellow “Status” LEDreacts in the following way to module conditions.Note: the LED may appear to be flashing wheninput goes high and low repeatedly.

Notes:1. This action is only available in Static mode.2. AC modules will react differently to the on-timelength and trigger time. The module can only betriggered ON during a zero crossing of the ACwaveform; similarly, the module can only switchOFF at a zero crossing point. The minimum on-timeis therefore restricted to half the total period of aregular waveform.3. Continuous pulse operation is supported only byVersion 2 models of BIMs 8502 and 8505.4. On 2/2 modules, this action is only available inStatic mode.

On Field circuit OK



Page 49 of 287

208002302

Image


Aug 2005

GeneralThese modules are designed to meet therequirements of a very wide range ofmechanical positioning and flowapplications. When used separately, the twoinput channels will accept pulse inputs tomeasure: frequency acceleration / rate number of pulses (i.e. counter)When combined, they provide: rotational position and direction data

from quadrature encoding devicesIn addition, the module has two digitaloutputs and one digital input to gate(start/stop) the channel 1 internal counter.

Pulse inputsPulse inputs can come from a range of sensors having different amplitudes, triggerlevels and input impedance requirements.Inputs types accepted are: Proximity detectors

(NAMUR/DIN19234) Current inputs Voltage inputs Switch / electro-mechanical inputs Theshold levels for the current and voltageinput can be set to suit the application.

Dynamic dataSeveral values are calculated, for eachchannel, from the signal pulses received.FrequencyThis is calculated by measuring the timeinterval between pulses. An average is calculated over a period (20 ms to 200 s)defined by the user. The time interval ismeasured from the edge of one pulse to thesame edge of the next pulse. The polarity(rising or falling edge) can be configured.The default is the rising edge.There are ten frequency measurementranges. They start at 0 – 100 Hz and rise inratios of 3, 5 and 10. However, themaximum frequency of the module is 50kHz,so any values in the 100 kHz range thatexceed this should be considered as “out-of-range”.AccelerationThis is calculated from the difference in frequency from the start to the end of thesample period. A positive value indicates anincrease in the rate of frequency and anegative value is a decrease in the rate.

CountingEach channel has a 32-bit counter thatindicates the total number of input pulsessince the counter was reset. The counter onChannel 1 can be started and stopped bythe control gate input and both channelcounters can be started, stopped and resetby BIM commands.Counters can be configured to count up (thedefault) or down. If the quadraturecalculation is enabled (see below) then the configured counter direction is ignored;instead counter direction is determined bythe quadrature value (up for forward, downfor reverse).A counter preset value can be configured bya BIM command which also resets thecounter. On reaching the preset count valuean event is triggered which can also bepassed to the channel’s digital output. Thisstate is cleared by resetting the counter orassigning a new preset value.

Quadrature (rotation direction)

The second channel can be used todetermine direction of rotation by comparingthe phase of its input p ulse with that of thefirst channel.

If the Ch 2 input is in a low state on the risingedge of the Ch 1 pulse then the rotation isforward (Fig 1a). If the Ch 2 input is highon the rising edge of the Ch 1 pulse then therotation is backward (Fig 1b).

FilteringThe module has a hardware filter which can beused to minimise the effects of contact bounce.The available settings are 1, 5, 20 kHz and Off.

AlarmsHigh / Low alarmsHigh and low alarms can be configured foreach channel. When the input value goesbeyond an alarm limit, channel and moduleflags are set, the channel LED flashes and, ifconfigured, the channel’s digital output statewill change.Acceleration alarmsAn acceleration alarm limit can also be set.If the limit is exceeded the actions taken areidentical to those for the high/low alarms.Alarm deadbandA deadband can be specified for the high,low and acceleration alarms. This provideshysteresis to avoid repetitive alarms in noisysignal environments.Missing pulse alarmBoth channels can be configured to detect a“missing pulse”. If no input pulse is detectedfor a defined time period an alarm issignalled in the same way as the high/lowalarms.The alarm is cleared on receipt of a pulse oron reconfiguration of the alarm. The timeperiod is restarted after each sample periodin which at least one pulse occurs.Line Fault DetectEach channel can be configured to sense anopen or a short circuit condition on inputs.On detection, the actions are those for thehigh/low alarms.On fault, the BIM can: report the frequencyvalue as being at the top or the bottom of therange, freeze the counter, set theacceleration to zero; depending on how theBIM is configured.

Control dataThe host can write data to control eachchannel counter. The available parametersare: start, stop, set, reset and preset value.

Digital outputsBoth digital output channels can reflect thestatus of the inputs by indicating: frequency or acceleration alarm counter preset value reached while the

main channel can also output: quadrature forward or reverse signal scaled retransmission (a “divided by N”

version of the input)

Pulse Input Modules - 2-channel pulse/quadrature

Page 50 of 287

208002302

Image


June 2004


I/O module types

2/2 modules

Analog input modules8-channel, 4–20 mA with HART® ..............................................................8101–HI–TX8-channel, 4–20 mA ................................................................................8103–AI–TX8-channel, 1–5 V ....................................................................................8119–VI–05

THC and RTD modules4-channel, THC and mV ............................................................................8105–TI–TC4-channel, RTD and Ω ................................................................................8106–TI–RT

Analog output modules8-channel, 4–20 mA with HART® ..............................................................8102–HO–IP8-channel, 4–20 mA ................................................................................8104–AO–IP

Discrete input modules8-channel, 24 V dc, isolated, sinking ........................................................8109–DI–DC16-channel, 24 V dc, isolated, sinking ......................................................8122–DI–DC8-channel, 24 V dc, non-isolated, module powered ....................................8110–DI–DC16-channel, 24 V dc, non-isolated, module powered ..................................8121–DI–DC8-channel, 115 V ac, isolated, sinking ......................................................8111–DI–AC8-channel, 115 V ac, non-isolated, module powered ..................................8112–DI–AC8-channel, 230 V ac, isolated, sinking ......................................................8113–DI–AC8-channel, 230 V ac, non-isolated, module powered ..................................8114–DI–AC

Discrete output modules8-channel, 2–60 V dc, non-isolated, module powered................................8115–DO–DC8-channel, 20–265 V ac, non-isolated, module powered............................8116–DO–AC8-channel, 2–60 V dc, isolated, unpowered..............................................8117–DO–DC8-channel, 20–265 V ac, isolated, unpowered..........................................8118–DO–AC

Pulse input modules2-channel, pulse/quadrature input ............................................................8123–PI–QU

2/1 modules

Analog input modules8-channel, 4–20 mA with HART® ................................................................8201–HI–IS8-channel, 0–10V/potentiometer ................................................................8230–AI–IS

THC and RTD modules8-channel, THC and mV ..............................................................................8205–TI–IS8-channel, RTD and Ω ................................................................................8206–TI–IS

Analog output modules8-channel, 4–20 mA with HART® ..............................................................8202–HO–IS8-channel, 4–20 mA ................................................................................8204–AO–IS

Discrete input modules16 (8)* -channel, switch/proximity detector ..................................................8220–DI–IS

Discrete output modules4-channel, solenoid driver, IIC gas groups ..................................................8215–DO–IS

Pulse input modules2-channel, pulse/quadrature input ................................................................8223–PI–IS

*8-channel when used with 8624-FT-IS field terminalHART® is a registered trademark of the HART Communication Foundation.

Page 51 of 287

208002302

Image

General

All I/O modules are connected to

a high speed Bus Interface

Module (BIM) via a proprietary

bus system called ‘Railbus’ and

one BIM can control up to 32

modules.

The module carrier provides the

transmission medium for the

Railbus and, by plugging a

module onto a carrier,

connections are made between

the module and the bus. The

connectors on the carrier also

provide the power supply links to

the module and, when required,

power for the field wiring.


Aug 2005


Addressing of I/O modulesModules are addressed by the BIM in termsof their position, or slot, in the total chain of32 modules not by individual module types.As a result, a module can be removed andreplaced by another of its own type withoutthe need to ‘tell’ the BIM of the change.During configuration, the BIM is told thecharacteristics of each necessary moduleposition whether or not the module is presentat the time. Consequently, if a module isremoved for service replacement, theproperties of the ‘slot’ are still retained bythe BIM.

Important modesOutput failsafe modeOutput modules have the ability to assume afailsafe state. This can happen for two reasons.1) The BIM can force a module into a

failsafe state by issuing a specific command to it.

2) Modules have a configurable “timeout”parameter. This defines the maximumtime period of communication inactivitywith the BIM. If this period is exceededthe module adopts a failsafe state.

The different module types have their ownresponse to a failsafe command, and thoseresponses are described in the individualsections that follow.

Input fail valuesIn the event of failure of an input module, theBIM forces the reported value to apredefined state – low, high or hold lastvalue.This ensures that the host adopts a state consistent with safe operation of the plant.

Power-up/initialisation stateWhen powering-up a node it is essential forplant safety that the state of each of the outputs is known. While the BIM isinitialising, the I/O modules are held in thepower-up state (see following pages). AfterBIM initialisation and before establishingcommunication with the host, the outputs areset to predefined “initialisation” states. This“safe-state” can be defined by the user foreach output channel.

Non-volatile configurationmemoryThe configuration information for all I/Omodules in a node is stored in the BIM innon-volatile memory (NVM). When amodule is replaced, when the node ispowered up or following a reset, the BIMwill download the stored configurationinformation to the relevant I/O modules.

Visual indicatorsLEDs are provided on each module to indicatePower, Fault and channel Status information.These are based on the NAMUR NE44specification for LED indicators.The Power and Fault indicators are commonto all I/O modules and their states areshown in the following tables.

Module ‘Fault’ LED (red)

BFP = Bussed Field Power of 2/2 modules

Module ‘Power’ LED (green)

Module ‘Status’ LED (yellow)The channel “Status” indicators have differentmeanings according to the module type andare described in the individual module sections.

Important noteIf, when using the 8502 Profibus BIM, thenode is configured over Profibus, a reducedset of configuration parameters is available.In this case, the module specifications shouldbe read in conjunction with the Profibus BIMinstruction manual INM8502 which explainsthe configuration options.

Alternatively, if the 8455 ConfiguratorSoftware is used to configure a Profibusnode, a fully detailed range of moduleconfiguration parameters is available.

GSD files are available for either of theabove options.

On Failsafe A/D error on AI BFP failure on 2/2 AI

Off Normal

Flashing Initialisation error

On Power OK

Off Power failure

Page 52 of 287

208002302

Image


June 2004

Default/Power-up conditionsThese modules use the following valueswhen they power up.Module mode



All alarms are made inactive by having their values set to high or low extremes, as appropriate. Dead Zone


Software FilteringDisabled.PassthroughPassthrough messages to HART instrumentsare always allowed.


An error – i.e. a flashing LED – could be asa result of any of the following conditions:a) a loss of HART signal, b) an error in the A/D converter, c) a NAMUR alarm or d) a Hi (-Hi) or Low (-Low) alarm.

Analog Input Modules - 4-20mA

GeneralThe 4–20 mA AI modules provide digitiseddata and status information from 4–20 mAcurrent loop sensors.

HART® capabilityAI modules “with HART” can obtain information from HART instruments of protocol revision 5.0 or later. Each channelcan communicate with a single HART instrument. HART universal command 3 isused to gather up to 4 dynamic variablesand status from each HART instrument. Thisprovides more process information to thecontrol system from each device. Greateraccuracy can also be achieved by eliminating A/D and D/A errors.In addition, HART pass-through may be usedfor device configuration, calibration andadvanced diagnostics.

Input samplingThe AI modules have eight user-channels thatare sampled every 27 ms (2/2) or 33 ms(2/1).

Data formatThe input signal is stored as a 16-bitunsigned value. In this range 0 is equivalentto 0mA and 65,535 is equivalent to 25mA.Any digital HART data is stored in its original IEEE754 floating point format.

FilteringThe Analog Input modules use a first-ordersoftware filter that provides 12 dB attenuation atthe Nyquist frequency of the algorithm. Thefilter supports a set of options that can bematched with control algorithm execution rates.

Input alarmsFour configurable alarm levels are providedfor each channel—two high and two low(see figure below). When an input valueexceeds an alarm limit a flag is set and theBIM gets a new alarm status.

Alarm deadbandThe Alarm Deadband prevents the alarmfrom tripping on and off because of systemnoise. It can be configured for each channeland is always set on the ‘inner’ side of thealarm limit to be, typically, greater than thesystem noise in the plant. If an alarm is activated, it will remain until the input movesthe full extent of the deadband towards a“safer” value.The Hi-Hi and Lo-Lo alarms support theNAMUR recommendations, i.e. if the alarm

limit is set less than 3.6 mA (Lo-Lo), orgreater than 21.0 mA (Hi-Hi), the alarmsmust be active for 4 seconds before thealarm is set. The Deadband does not applyto NAMUR alarms. If the alarm limits are setat values between the NAMUR limits, thealarms function normally.


Module operating statesNormal/Failsafe modeThe AI modules support failsafe mode asdefined in the earlier I/O module introductorysection. When not in failsafe the moduleadopts Normal mode.




Hi Alarm cleared

Deadbands

Lo Alarm limit

Lo Lo Alarm limit

Hi Alarm limit

Hi Hi Alarm limit

Hi Hi NAMUR Alarm cleared

Time

InputValue

ppVV

Hi Alarm set Hi Hi Alarm cleared

Hi Hi Alarm setHi Hi NAMUR Alarm set (4s delay)

Lo Alarm set

Lo Alarm cleared

Lo Lo Alarm cleared

Lo Lo Alarm setLo Lo NAMUR Alarm set (4s delay) Lo Lo NAMUR Alarm cleared

On Sensor loop OK



Page 53 of 287

208002302

Image


June 2004

Module operating statesNormal/Failsafe modeThe THC and RTD modules support failsafemode as defined in the earlier I/O moduleintroductory section. When not in failsafe themodule adopts Normal mode.


Power-up conditionsThe module uses the following values when itpowers up.Module mode



All alarms are made inactive by having their values set to high or low extremes, as appropriate. Dead zone


Software filteringDisabled

Channel typeType K thermocouple or 3-wire RTD - Pt100

O/C sensorOff

Visual indicatorsChannel “status” LED (yellow)

On Sensor loop OK



Analog Input Modules - THC and RTD

GeneralThese modules provide digitised data andstatus information of analog measurementsfrom thermocouples, mV sources, RTDs andresistance sources.Thermocouple modules provide four or eightchannels for monitoring input signals fromthermocouples or mV sources. The functionof the module is set up during configuration. Cold junction compensationfor thermocouple applications is provided bymeans of a sensor in the field terminal. Onlythe recommended field terminals can beused with these modules.RTD modules provide four or eight channelsfor monitoring input signals from RTD orresistance sources. The function of the module is set up during configuration. TheRTD can be 2-, 3- or 4-wire type. Only therecommended field terminals can be usedwith these modules.

Input samplingThermocouple modules sample at intervalsof 60 ms per channel. In addition, the module has cold junction temperaturecompensation that is refreshed every 1.8 seconds for 4-channel modules and every2.4 seconds for 8-channel modules. Thesampling technique for the RTD module issimilar where samples of the voltage across,and the current through, the RTD aremeasured at intervals of 60 ms per channel.Compensation methods reject the effect ofresistance in the cable conductors for 3-wireand 4-wire RTD/Resistance.

Data formatThe 8105/6 4-channel modules store dataas 15-bit plus sign integers (–32768 to+32768). The 8205/6 8-channel modulesstore data as 16-bit unsigned integers (0 to65535).

FilteringAn Infinite Impulse Response (IIR) filter isused on the input data before it reaches the A/D converter. Depending upon the coefficients selected, the output from the filter will be:a) the input value (filter OFF)

b) an average of the last two readings (filter ON - setting 1)

c) a running average of readings (filter ON- setting 2)

The coefficients can be selected individuallyfor each channel.

Input alarmsThe modules provide two configurable alarmlevels for each channel—a high limit and alow one. See figure.When an input value exceeds an alarm limitthe appropriate alarm bit (high or low) is setin the channel status byte. In addition, the“new data” signal is set to allow the controller to collect the new alarm statusinformation and the affected channel LEDwill flash.

Alarm deadbandThe alarm deadband (not shown on thediagram) is fixed at 1%.


Open sensor detectionWhen configured to do so, the modules willdetect an open circuit sensor and report itwithin 10 seconds. When this occurs a statusbit is set in the module and the affectedchannel LED flashes. The detection optionsfor the two module types are configurable asfollows:THC and mV

Off, drive upscale or drive downscaleRTD and resistance

Off or drive upscaleThese choices can be made for each channel.


Time

InputValue

ppVV

Lo Alarm limit

Lo Alarm set Lo Alarm cleared

Hi Alarm limit

Hi Alarm set Hi Alarm cleared

Page 54 of 287

208002302

Image


June 2004

1) Use configured failsafe values

In this (default) mode, the module forces theoutput to a predefined percentage value.The default value is 0%.

2) Hold last value

In this mode the channel holds the last valueit output.When not in failsafe the module adoptsNormal mode.

Channel Active/InactiveEach channel can be made active or inactive individually. When a channel ismade inactive the output is disabled, i.e. de-energised.When a channel is made Active again theoutput is driven based upon the current configuration.

Default/Power-up conditionsThe module uses predefined values when itpowers up. The following parameters summarise the state of the module when itpowers up.Module mode:

Normal (not “failsafe”)Active/inactive:

All channels power up in the Inactive state.

Visual indicatorChannel “Status” LED (yellow)

On the AO modules the yellow “Status” LEDreacts in the following way to module conditions.An error condition – i.e. a flashing LED –could be as the result of the loss of the HARTcommunications signal.

On Field circuit OK



Analog Output Modules - 4-20mA

GeneralThe 4–20 mA AO modules use a single D/Aconverter in a sample-and-hold configuration to drive each of the outputchannels. The processor sets the currentvalue for each of the active channels onceevery 20 ms. Any requested output valuesbelow 1mA are clamped to 1mA to ensurethat the open-loop detection mechanism isalways operable. To verify that active output channels havecurrent flowing to the field, the processorreads a hardware signal every time an output is written to the D/A converter. If thesignal indicates “no current flowing”, i.e. < 1 mA, for 50 consecutive scans (i.e. onesecond), an Open-Loop Detection failure isset for that channel.

HART® capabilityAO modules “with HART” are compatiblewith all HART devices of protocol revision5.0 or later. Each channel can communicatewith a single HART instrument and supports HART communication with the widerange of HART valve positioners nowavailable. HART universal command 3 canbe used to gather up to 4 dynamic HARTvariables such as valve position, air pressure, etc., together with HART statusvariables. These are scanned by the BIMand may be communicated over the LAN foreasy integration into the control system.In addition, HART pass-through may be usedfor device configuration, calibration andadvanced diagnostics.

Data formatThe output data has a resolution of 12 bitsbut is stored as a 16-bit unsigned value. Inthis range 0 is equivalent to 0mA and65,535 is equivalent to 25mA.

Module operating statesFailsafe modeThe module supports failsafe mode asdefined in the earlier I/O module introductory section. When put in failsafemode the output can be made to adopt oneof the following options.


Page 55 of 287

208002302

Image


June 2004

Discrete Input Modules

GeneralDI modules can accept up to 8 or 16 discrete inputs, depending upon moduletype, from dry contacts, NAMUR standardproximity detectors, or switched voltages.The source voltage for field switching can beprovided through the module or from anindependent supply out in the field.In operation, the input voltage is comparedagainst a threshold voltage to create a ‘true’or ‘false’ condition. If the inputs are fromZone 2/ Zone 1 or Zone 0 hazardousareas, the appropriate (2/1) module provides certified isolation for these signals.A pulse counter is also included which cancount the number of input pulses for each of thechannels.

Input filterAn input filter can be set individually foreach channel to introduce a delay periodthat allows the input to settle to a stablevalue.When switched off, the bandwidth of the DIinput is 250 Hz (100 Hz for 2/1 modules).The timeout filter can introduce a timeoutdelay of between 2 and 512 ms in 2 mssteps for 2/2 modules and between 3 and512 ms in 3 ms steps for 2/1 modules.Alternatively, preset values of “Fast” (22 ms)or “Slow” (258 ms) may be used.

LatchAny channel input can be configured to be“real time” or latched. If the latch feature isenabled, the polarity can also be set so thatan input signal that goes: high will be held high low will be held lowuntil the latch is released by a commandfrom the controller. All channels are latchedindependently and can be cleared

simultaneously, or independently, by a Write instruction to the module’s latch resetregister. If controlled by a BIM this will occurautomatically in 2 to 3 seconds.

Line fault detection (2/1 only)When enabled, this will cause a flag to beset to indicate a short or open circuit fault.

Low-frequency pulse counterThe DI modules contain a continuously running 16-bit pulse counter that counts eachlow-frequency pulse received on the input.The maximum pulse rate, with the timeoutfilter switched off, depends upon the moduleselected; consult the individual data sheetsfor details. With the filter active, themaximum pulse rate will be determined bythe timeout period used. In order to start aparticular count the counter must be reset tozero by a host instruction. When the counteroverflows (i.e. > 65,536 counts) it willrestart from zero.

Module operating states“Failsafe” modeThe module supports failsafe mode asdefined in the earlier I/O module introductory section.

Channel Active/InactiveEach channel can be made active or inactive individually. When a channel ismade inactive: inputs are not processed—i.e. the last

input value is held and not refreshed

channel events are not generated

the counter is not incremented


Normal (not “failsafe”)Channel types:

All latches and filters are offActive/Inactive:

All channels power-up in the Active state

Visual indicators

Channel “Status” LED (yellow)On the DI modules the yellow “Status” LEDreacts in the following way to module conditions.Note: the LED may appear to flash when the inputgoes high and low repeatedly.

On Channel input “high” or latched

Off Channel input “low”

Flashing Line fault detect (2/1 only)

Page 56 of 287

208002302

Image


June 2004

Discrete Output Modules

GeneralDO modules can provide up to 4 or 8 discreteoutputs, depending upon module type. Linefault detection is also provided on the 2/1 modules for both open- and short-circuitconditions.

Output ModeThe DO module outputs may be configuredfor one of three different types of output: Discrete Single pulse Continuous pulse

DiscreteThe Bus Interface Module (BIM) signals anON or OFF condition on demand.

Singe Pulse(See Notes 1 & 2)This is an individual “single-shot” action, creating a single ON pulse of specifiedduration that occurs at a definable time. Thepulse on-time can be varied between 2ms and130s in increments of 2ms. If a new ONcommand (i.e. trigger) is given during the ONperiod the pulse will restart. If a new pulsewidth is supplied during the ON period, itwill not take effect until the next ON period.A pulse can experience a small amount oftime dither that depends upon the amount ofRailbus activity. This can be ± 1% of thepulse width or ± 3.5 ms, whichever is thelonger.

Continuous Pulse(see Notes 2, 3 & 4)This type of output provides a continuouspulse train that is defined by the pulse on-time, and the pulse period (the time betweenthe start of each ON time). The pulse periodis configurable to any value between 4 msand 130,000 ms in 2 ms steps. The pulseon-time is the same as for the momentaryaction described above. The on-time mustnot exceed the setting for the pulse period.(See also the above note regarding ACmodules.)Pulses can experience a small amount oftime dither that depends upon the amount ofRailbus activity. This can be ± 1% of thepulse period, or ± 3.5 ms, whichever is thelonger.Continuous pulse operation has two distinctmodes—static and dynamic. When in staticmode, the pulse parameters are clearedfrom memory when the channel is madeinactive; in dynamic mode the values areretained for use when the channel is madeactive once again.

Line Fault detection (2/1 only)When enabled, this will cause a flag to beset to indicate a short or open circuit faulteven when channel output is in OFF state.

Module operating statesFailsafe modeThe module supports failsafe mode asdefined in the earlier I/O moduleintroductory section, with the following two additions:

1) Channel using “Configured failsafe values”

In this mode, the module will force the outputs to predefined levels— defined on aper channel basis. On entering “failsafe”:

a) If channel is in Static mode of operation:

Pulse mode is disabled and the channelis configured as a latched output and isdriven to its failsafe value.


If in single pulse (momentary) mode, theconfiguration is not cleared, but theoutput is driven to its failsafe value.

On leaving failsafe:

Channel will adopt the mode definedbelow for a channel going from inactive to active state

2) Channel using “Hold last value”

If the module goes into failsafe during a single pulse, it is allowed to complete thepulse before adopting the failsafe state. Alatched (discrete) output will remain at itscurrent value.

Channel Active/ Inactive Each channel can be made active or inactive individually. When a channel is made inactive the outputis turned OFF (i.e. de-energised).When a channel changes from inactive toactive the following situations apply:a) If channel is in Static mode of operation:

It becomes a latched output and willremain so until reconfigured by the BIM.


The channel will resume operation withits previous configuration and output.


Normal (not failsafe)Channel types

All channels are configured as Discrete outputs

Active/Inactive All channels power-up in the Inactivestate

Line fault detection (2/1 only)Disabled on all channels


On the DO modules the yellow “Status” LEDreacts in the following way to module conditions.Note: the LED may appear to be flashing wheninput goes high and low repeatedly.

Notes:1. This action is only available in Static mode.2. AC modules will react differently to the on-timelength and trigger time. The module can only betriggered ON during a zero crossing of the ACwaveform; similarly, the module can only switchOFF at a zero crossing point. The minimum on-timeis therefore restricted to half the total period of aregular waveform.3. Continuous pulse operation is supported only byVersion 2 models of BIMs 8502 and 8505.4. On 2/2 modules, this action is only available inStatic mode.

On Field circuit OK



Page 57 of 287

208002302

Image


Aug 2005

GeneralThese modules are designed to meet therequirements of a very wide range ofmechanical positioning and flowapplications. When used separately, the twoinput channels will accept pulse inputs tomeasure: frequency acceleration / rate number of pulses (i.e. counter)When combined, they provide: rotational position and direction data

from quadrature encoding devicesIn addition, the module has two digitaloutputs and one digital input to gate(start/stop) the channel 1 internal counter.

Pulse inputsPulse inputs can come from a range of sensors having different amplitudes, triggerlevels and input impedance requirements.Inputs types accepted are: Proximity detectors

(NAMUR/DIN19234) Current inputs Voltage inputs Switch / electro-mechanical inputs Theshold levels for the current and voltageinput can be set to suit the application.

Dynamic dataSeveral values are calculated, for eachchannel, from the signal pulses received.FrequencyThis is calculated by measuring the timeinterval between pulses. An average is calculated over a period (20 ms to 200 s)defined by the user. The time interval ismeasured from the edge of one pulse to thesame edge of the next pulse. The polarity(rising or falling edge) can be configured.The default is the rising edge.There are ten frequency measurementranges. They start at 0 – 100 Hz and rise inratios of 3, 5 and 10. However, themaximum frequency of the module is 50kHz,so any values in the 100 kHz range thatexceed this should be considered as “out-of-range”.AccelerationThis is calculated from the difference in frequency from the start to the end of thesample period. A positive value indicates anincrease in the rate of frequency and anegative value is a decrease in the rate.

CountingEach channel has a 32-bit counter thatindicates the total number of input pulsessince the counter was reset. The counter onChannel 1 can be started and stopped bythe control gate input and both channelcounters can be started, stopped and resetby BIM commands.Counters can be configured to count up (thedefault) or down. If the quadraturecalculation is enabled (see below) then the configured counter direction is ignored;instead counter direction is determined bythe quadrature value (up for forward, downfor reverse).A counter preset value can be configured bya BIM command which also resets thecounter. On reaching the preset count valuean event is triggered which can also bepassed to the channel’s digital output. Thisstate is cleared by resetting the counter orassigning a new preset value.

Quadrature (rotation direction)

The second channel can be used todetermine direction of rotation by comparingthe phase of its input p ulse with that of thefirst channel.

If the Ch 2 input is in a low state on the risingedge of the Ch 1 pulse then the rotation isforward (Fig 1a). If the Ch 2 input is highon the rising edge of the Ch 1 pulse then therotation is backward (Fig 1b).

FilteringThe module has a hardware filter which can beused to minimise the effects of contact bounce.The available settings are 1, 5, 20 kHz and Off.

AlarmsHigh / Low alarmsHigh and low alarms can be configured foreach channel. When the input value goesbeyond an alarm limit, channel and moduleflags are set, the channel LED flashes and, ifconfigured, the channel’s digital output statewill change.Acceleration alarmsAn acceleration alarm limit can also be set.If the limit is exceeded the actions taken areidentical to those for the high/low alarms.Alarm deadbandA deadband can be specified for the high,low and acceleration alarms. This provideshysteresis to avoid repetitive alarms in noisysignal environments.Missing pulse alarmBoth channels can be configured to detect a“missing pulse”. If no input pulse is detectedfor a defined time period an alarm issignalled in the same way as the high/lowalarms.The alarm is cleared on receipt of a pulse oron reconfiguration of the alarm. The timeperiod is restarted after each sample periodin which at least one pulse occurs.Line Fault DetectEach channel can be configured to sense anopen or a short circuit condition on inputs.On detection, the actions are those for thehigh/low alarms.On fault, the BIM can: report the frequencyvalue as being at the top or the bottom of therange, freeze the counter, set theacceleration to zero; depending on how theBIM is configured.

Control dataThe host can write data to control eachchannel counter. The available parametersare: start, stop, set, reset and preset value.

Digital outputsBoth digital output channels can reflect thestatus of the inputs by indicating: frequency or acceleration alarm counter preset value reached while the

main channel can also output: quadrature forward or reverse signal scaled retransmission (a “divided by N”

version of the input)

Pulse Input Modules - 2-channel pulse/quadrature

Page 58 of 287

208002302

Image


June 2004

8-channel Analog Input

8 single-ended 4-20 mA input channels

non-incendive field circuits

HART pass-through

HART variable and status reporting

2- or 4-wire transmitters

open and short circuit detection

24 V dc bussed field power required

MODULE SPECIFICATIONSee also System Specification

INPUTSNumber of channels ......................................8, single-endedNominal signal range (span) .............................4 to 20 mAFull signal range..................................................1 to 23 mALine fault detection Short circuit current ...................................................> 23.5 mAOpen circuit current ..................................................< 0.5 mAOutput voltage (@ 20mA).................................13.5 V (min.)Output current .................................................32 mA (max.)Accuracy (over temp range) .........................± 0.1% of spanResolution ...................................................................16 bitsRepeatability ...................................................0.05% of spanIsolation(any channel to Railbus) ...............................................100 V ac(between channels).............................................................none

CONFIGURABLE PARAMETERSAlarms ....................................high, high-high, low and low-lowAlarm deadband (hysteresis)....................user defined valueInput filter time constant ...........................user defined valueInput dead zone .........................................user defined valueDrive on failsafe ...................... disabled /upscale /downscaleChannel status............................................... active /inactiveHART variable and status reporting .......... enable /disable

RESPONSE TIMESignal change to availability on Railbus4–20 mA mode .....................................................27 ms (max.)HART mode...................................................0.75 s per channel

SAFETYFM non-incendive field wiring parameters (each channel) ..............Voc = 28.7 V; Isc = 33 mA; Ca = 0.17 µF; La = 11.0 mH

POWER SUPPLIESRailbus (12V) current ....................................100 mA (typ.).........................................................................150 mA (max.)Bussed Field Power 2-wire Tx..............300 mA (max.) (@ 24 V dc ±10%) 4-wire Tx................60 mA (max.)

MECHANICALModule Key Code ............................................................A1Module width .............................................................42 mmWeight ..........................................................................200 g

4–20 mA with HART® 8101-HI-TX

Safe areaor Zone 2/Div 2 hazardous area

MUX

Current Limit

Otherchannels

24 VdcBussed Field Power

Railbus

Channel 1 of 8

4-20mA

HHC A/D

µP


Otherchannels


Railbus

MUX A/D

µP

4-20mA

Channel 1 of 8

HHC

General Purpose 8602-FT-ST 8604-FT-FUStandard Fused

Class 1, Div 2 8601-FT-NI 8603-FT-FUor Zone 2 Non-incendive Non-incendivehazardous area Fused

Field wiring Recommended CompatibleField Terminal Field Terminal

FIELD TERMINALS (2-WIRE TX)

General Purpose 8615-FT-4W -

Class 1, Div 2 8615-FT-4W -or Zone 2hazardous area



®HART is a registered trademark of the HART Communication Foundation.

2-wire transmitter

4-wire transmitter

Page 59 of 287

208002302

Image


June 2004


8 single-ended 4-20 mA input channels


4–20 mA

2- or 4-wire transmitters

open and short circuit detection



INPUTSNumber of channels ......................................8, single-endedNominal signal range (span) .............................4 to 20 mAFull signal range..................................................1 to 23 mAOut of range alarmLower threshold.........................................................> 23.5 mAUpper threshold ........................................................< 0.5 mAOutput voltage (@ 20 mA) ................................13.5 V (min.)Output current ..................................................32 mA (max.)Accuracy (over temp range) .........................± 0.1% of spanResolution ...................................................................16 bitsRepeatability ...................................................0.05% of spanIsolation(any channel to Railbus) ...............................................100 V ac(between channels).............................................................none

CONFIGURABLE PARAMETERSAlarms ....................................high, high-high, low and low-lowAlarm deadband (hysteresis) ...................user defined valueInput filter time constant ...........................user defined valueInput dead zone .........................................user defined valueDrive on failsafe ...................... disabled /upscale /downscaleChannel status............................................... active /inactive

RESPONSE TIMESignal change to availability on Railbus ........27 ms (max.)


POWER SUPPLIESRailbus (12V) current ....................................100 mA (typ.).........................................................................150 mA (max.)Bussed Field Power .....................2-wire Tx 300 mA (max.)(@ 24 Vdc ± 10%) 4-wire Tx 60 mA (max.)

4–20 mA 8103-AI-TX



Current Limit

Otherchannels


Railbus

Channel 1 of 8

!

"






2-wire transmitter

4-wire transmitter

Page 60 of 287

208002302

Image


June 2004


8 single-ended input channels


1–5 V inputs

open circuit and short circuit detection



INPUTSNumber of channels ......................................8, single-endedNominal signal range (span) ..................................1 to 5 VFull signal range ............................................0.19 to 5.64 VInput impedance ..........................................................2 MΩOut of range alarmLower threshold ...........................................................< 0.19 VUpper threshold ...........................................................> 5.64 VAccuracy (over temp range) .........................± 0.1% of spanResolution ...................................................................16 bitsRepeatability ...................................................0.05% of spanIsolation (any channel to Railbus) ........................100 V ac(between channels).............................................................none

CONFIGURABLE PARAMETERSAlarms ....................................high, high-high, low and low-lowAlarm deadband (hysteresis) ...................user defined valueInput filter time constant ...........................user defined valueInput dead zone .........................................user defined valueDrive on failsafe ...................... disabled /upscale /downscaleChannel status............................................... active /inactive

RESPONSE TIMESignal change to availability on Railbus ........27 ms (max.)


POWER SUPPLIESRailbus (12V) current ....................................100 mA (typ.).........................................................................150 mA (max.)Bussed Field Power .............. 60 mA (max.) at 24 Vdc ± 10%


1–5 V 8119-VI-05


Otherchannels


Railbus

MUX A/D

µP

Channel 1 of 8

1–5VDC

General Purpose 8615-FT-4W –4-wire transmitter

Class 1, Div 2 8615-FT-4W –or Zone 2 4-wire transmitterhazardous area


FIELD TERMINALS

Page 61 of 287

208002302

Image


Mar 2005



4 thermocouple or mV* input channels

cold junction compensation


INPUTSNumber of channels ..........................................................4THCs types...............B,E,J,K,N,R,S, or T to EN 60584-2, IEC584-2, BS4937; ...........................................................................W3 and W5.

Basic THC accuracy (BTA)..............25°C ±0.05% of THC span........................................+10°C to +40°C ±0.1% of THC span........................................–40°C to +70°C ±0.3% of THC spanCold junction compensation error† <± 1°C (–40 to + 70°C)Resolution .................................................15 bits plus sign bitCommon mode rejection......................> 80 dB @ 50/60 HzSeries mode rejection...........................> 40 dB @ 50/60 HzMaximum input voltage ..........................................± 4.0 VCommon mode voltage between channels ..± 4.5 V (max.)Isolation (any channel to Railbus) ..................250 V ac rmsOpen circuit bleed current............................± 0.5 µA (nom.)

CONFIGURABLE PARAMETERSSensor type ......................................................user selectableInput dead zone (hysteresis).....................user defined valueSelectable input filtering ..off /2 reading avge./running avge.Drive on open circuit fault ...... disabled /upscale /downscaleAlarms ................................................................high and lowChannel status................................................active/ inactive

RESPONSE TIMESSignal change to availability on Railbus...........................................................................120 ms (min.)..........................................................................420 ms (max.)O/C sensor detection..................................................≤ 10 s

SAFETYFM non-incendive field wiring parameters (each channel) ............Voc = 10.5 V; Isc = 3.6 mA; Ca = 14.9 µF; La = 1000 mH

POWER SUPPLIESRailbus (12V) current.......................................150 mA (typ.).........................................................................200 mA (max.)Bussed Field Power ............................................not required

MECHANICALModule Key Code ............................................................C1Module width .............................................................42 mmWeight ..........................................................................200 g

Thermocouple and mV 8105-TI-TC

MUX A/D

Otherchannels

Railbus

µP

Channel 1 of 4

CJ

mV

General purpose 8605-FT-TC –THC

Class 1, Div 2 8605-FT-TC –or Z one 2 THChazadous area


FIELD TERMINAL

* Consult GE Fanuc for availability† C J compensation located in recommended field terminal

mV 0 to + 120mV ±0.1% of span (+10 to +40°C)

±0.2% of span (–40 to +70°C)

THC: B 0 to + 1820°C < 600°C 1.5°C + BTA

≥ 600°C 0.45°C + BTA

E – 270 to + 1000°C 0.3°C + BTA

J – 210 to + 1200°C 0.3°C + BTA

K – 270 to + 1372°C 0.3°C + BTA

N – 270 to + 1300°C 0.3°C + BTA

R – 50 to + 1767°C 0.6°C + BTA

S – 50 to + 1767°C 0.4°C + BTA

T – 270 to + 400°C 0.3°C + BTA

W3 0 to + 2320°C 0.6°C + BTA

W5 0 to + 2320°C 0.4°C + BTA

Input type Range Overall accuracy

Page 62 of 287

208002302

Image


June 2004


4 RTD or resistance* source inputs

function defined by configuration

2-, 3- or 4-wire RTD types accommodated


INPUTSNumber of channels ..........................................................4RTD input (2,3, or 4 wire).........................................Pt100 to BS1904/DIN43760/IEC 75............................................Ni120; jPt100 to JIS C1604: 1989Input range

Input resistance range (span).............................0 to 500 ΩAccuracy (% of span)

RTD excitation current ....................................200 µA (nom.)Resolution .................................................15 bits plus sign bitCommon mode rejection......................> 80 dB @ 50/60 HzSeries mode rejection...........................> 40 dB @ 50/60 HzIsolation (any channel to Railbus) ..................250 V ac rmsOpen circuit bleed current...............................0.5 µA (nom.)

CONFIGURABLE PARAMETERSSensor type........................................................user selectionInput deadzone ..........................................user defined valueSelectable input filtering...off /2-reading avge./running avge.Drive on open circuit fault........................ disabled /upscaleAlarms ................................................................high and lowChannel status................................................active/ inactiveOffset (2-wire RTD mode)..........................user defined value

RESPONSE TIMESSignal change to availability on Railbus...........................................................................180 ms (min.)..........................................................................840 ms (max.)O/C sensor detection..................................................≤ 10 s

SAFETYFM non-incendive field wiring parameters (each channel) ............Voc = 10.5 V; Isc = 3.6 mA; Ca = 14.9 µF; La = 1000 mH

POWER SUPPLIESRailbus (12V) current.......................................150 mA (typ.).........................................................................200 mA (max.)Bussed Field Power ............................................not required


RTD and ΩΩ 8106-TI -RT


MUX A/D

µP

Otherchannels

Railbus

Channel 1 of 4

General purpose 8606-FT-RT –RTD

Class 1, Div 2 8606-FT-RT –or Zone 2 RTDhazardous areas


FIELD TERMINAL

* consult GE Fanuc for availability

Resistance Consult GE Fanuc for availability

RTDs: Pt100 – 200 to + 850 °C

jPt100 – 200 to + 510 °C

Ni120 – 80 to + 320 °C

Input type Range

25°C ± 0.05%

+10 to + 40°C ± 0.1%

– 40 to + 70°C ± 0.2%

Tamb (RTD & ΩΩ inputs)

Page 63 of 287

208002302

Image


June 2004

8-channel Analog Output

8 single-ended 4-20 mA output channels


HART pass-through


valve positioners and remote indicators, etc.

open circuit detection on each channel



INPUTSNumber of channels ......................................8, single-endedNominal signal range (span) .............................4 to 20 mAFull signal range..................................................1 to 23 mAOpen loop detection threshold .....................0.7 ± 0.25 mAOutput compliance .......................20 mA at 21.6 V dc supply......................................................................(into 700 Ω load)Accuracy (over temp range) .......................± 0.25% of spanResolution ...................................................................12 bitsIsolation(any channel to Railbus) ...............................................100 V ac(between channels).............................................................none

CONFIGURABLE PARAMETERSInitialisation state.........................................predefined valueDrive on fail-safe ..........................predefined value/last valueChannel status............................................... active /inactiveHART variable and status reporting............enable /disable

RESPONSE TIMESignal change to availability on Railbus4–20 mA mode .....................................................25 ms (max.)HART mode...................................................0.75 s per channel


POWER SUPPLIESRailbus (12V) current ....................................100 mA (typ.).........................................................................150 mA (max.)Bussed Field Power ............ 300 mA (max.) at 24 Vdc ± 10%


4–20 mA with HART® 8102-HO-IP


MUX

µP

Regulator

Otherchannels

Railbus


D/A

Channel 1 of 8

4-20mAP

I

HHC




FIELD TERMINALS


Page 64 of 287

208002302

Image


June 2004


8 single-ended outputs

4–20 mA

for I/P converters and remote indicators, etc

open circuit detection is provided on each channel



OUTPUTSNumber of channels ......................................8, single-endedNominal signal range (span) .............................4 to 20 mAFull signal output range .....................................1 to 23 mAOpen loop detection threshold .....................0.7 ± 0.25 mAOutput compliance.............................20 mA at 21.6 V dc supply (into 700 Ω load)Accuracy (over temp range) .......................± 0.25% of spanOutput ripple................................................< 0.02% of spanResolution ...................................................................12 bitsIsolationany channel to Railbus .................................................100 V ac

CONFIGURABLE PARAMETERSInitialisation state.........................................predefined valueDrive on fail-safe ........................predefined value / last valueChannel status...............................................active / inactive

RESPONSE TIMEResponse timeFrom Railbus command to output change ..................25 ms (max.)


POWER SUPPLIESRailbus (12V) current ....................................100 mA (typ.) .........................................................................150 mA (max.)Bussed Field Power..............300 mA (max.) @ 24 V dc ±10%Quiescent current .......................................................60 mA


4–20 mA 8104-AO-IP


MUX D/A

Regulator

Otherchannels

Railbus


µP

Channel 1 of 8

4-20mAP

I

General purpose 8602-FT-ST 8604-FT-FUStandard Fused

Class 1, Div 2 8601-FT-NI 8603-FT-FUor Zone 2 Non-incendive Non-incendive,hazardous areas fused


FIELD TERMINAL

Page 65 of 287

208002302

Image


June 2004

8-channel Discrete Input

8 discrete isolated inputs

24 V dc field voltage sources

user definable input threshold

pulse counting option


INPUTSNumber of channels ..........................................................8OFF voltage..........................................................< 3.2 V dcON voltage ..........................................................> 11 V dcWetting current ...............................6.3 mA (nom.) @ 24 V dcMinimum pulse width detected ...................................3 msMaximum switching frequency (no-filtering).........200 HzMaximum voltage Input ............................................................................30 V dcReverse input..............................................................– 25 V dc

CONFIGURABLE PARAMETERSSelectable input filter .......................fast, slow or user defined (User defined permits 0 to 512 ms values in 2ms steps)Latch inputs ....................................................enable /disableLatch polarity................................latch on high / latch on lowPulse counting ...............................................enable /disable

RESPONSE TIMEI/O response timeField event to new data available on Railbus...............3 ms (max.)

SAFETYFM non-incendive field wiring parameters (each channel)......................Vmax = 30 V; Imax = 100 mA; Ci = 0 µF; Li = 0 mH

POWER SUPPLIESRailbus (12V) current........................................35 mA (typ.)...........................................................................55 mA (max.)Bussed Field Power ............................................not required

MECHANICALModule Key Code.............................................................B2Module width .............................................................42 mmWeight ..........................................................................170 g

24 V dc, isolated, sinking 8109-DI-DC


Railbus

µP

Channel 1 of 8

24VDC24VDC

General purpose 8602-FT-ST 8604-FT-FUStandard † Fused

Class 1, Div 2 8610-FT-NA 8611-FT-FUor Zone 2 Non-arcing † Non-arcinghazardous areas Fused


FIELD TERMINAL

† External fusing of the Field Power supply is recommended in order to protect the field wiring.

Page 66 of 287

208002302

Image


June 2004


16 input channels

24 V dc field voltage sources

individually isolated channels

user definable input threshod



INPUTSNumber of channels ........................................................16OFF voltage..........................................................< 3.4 V dcON voltage ..........................................................> 11 V dcWetting current ...............................2.8 mA (nom.) @ 24 V dcMinimum pulse width detected ...................................5 msMax input freq in pulse counting mode (no-debounce)....................................................................................100 HzMaximum voltageInput ............................................................................30 V dcReverse input .............................................................-– 25 V dcIsolation (Any Channel to railbus) ........................250 V acIsolation (channel to channel) ...........................150 V peak


RESPONSE TIMEI/O response time ...............................................5 ms (max.)(Field event to new data available on Railbus)

SAFETYFM non-incendive field wiring parameters (each channel)......................Vmax = 30 V; Imax = 100 mA; Ci = 0 µF; Li = 0 mH

POWER SUPPLIESRailbus (12V) current........................................90 mA (typ.).........................................................................135 mA (max.)Bussed Field Power ............................................not required

MECHANICALModule Key Code .............................................................E2Module width .............................................................42 mmWeight ..........................................................................210 g

24 V dc, isolated, sinking 8122-DI-DC


µPChannel 1 of 16

Railbusilb24VDC

General purpose 8617-FT-NI † –16 channel DI

Class 1, Div 2 8617-FT-NI †or Zone 2 16 channel DI –hazardous areas


FIELD TERMINAL

† External fusing of the Field Power supply is recommended in order to protect the field wiring.

Page 67 of 287

208002302

Image


June 2004

SAFETYFM non-incendive field wiring parameters (each channel)..............Voc = 30 V; Isc = 15.2 mA; Ca = 0.12 µF; La = 151 mH

POWER SUPPLIESRailbus (12V) current........................................35 mA (typ.)...........................................................................55 mA (max.)Bussed Field Power ...........................40 mA, @ 18—30 V dc



8 discrete inputs

for dry contact switches

24 V dc provided on input high side

returns commoned internally




INPUTSNumber of channels ..........................................................8OFF current ...........................................................< 0.69 mAON current ............................................................> 2.24 mAWetting current ....................................................5 mA (typ.)Minimum pulse width detected ...................................3 msMaximum switching frequency (no-filtering).........200 HzIsolation (any channel to Railbus) ........................250 V ac


RESPONSE TIMEI/O response timeField event to new data available on Railbus...............3 ms (max.)

24 V dc, non-isolated, module powered 8110-DI-DC



Railbus

µP

Channel 1 of 8

† External fusing of the field power supply is recommended in order to protect the field wiring.


Class 1, Div 2 8601-FT-NI 8603-FT-FUor Zone 2 Non-incendive † Non-incendive,hazardous areas fused


FIELD TERMINAL

Page 68 of 287

208002302

Image


June 2004



"

16 input channels

for dry contact switches

24 V dc provided on input high side





INPUTSNumber of channels ........................................................16OFF current .............................................................< 0.3 mAON current ...............................................................>1.2 mAWetting current .................................................2.8 mA (typ.)Minimum pulse width detected ...................................5 msMax input freq in pulse counting mode (no-debounce)....................................................................................100 HzIsolation (any channel to Railbus) ........................250 V ac


RESPONSE TIMEI/O response time ...............................................5 ms (max.)(Field event to new data available on Railbus)

SAFETYFM non-incendive field wiring parameters (each channel)..............Voc = 30 V; Isc = 3.5 mA; Ca = 0.12 µF; La = 1000 mH

POWER SUPPLIESRailbus (12V) current........................................90 mA (typ.).........................................................................135 mA (max.)Bussed Field Power.............................60 mA, @ 18–30 V dc


24 V dc, non-isolated, module-powered 8121-DI-DC

General purpose 8617-FT-NI –16 channel DI

Class 1, Div 2 8617-FT-NIor Zone 2 16 channel DI –hazardous areas


FIELD TERMINAL

Page 69 of 287

208002302

Image


June 2004


115 V ac, isolated, sinking 8111-DI-AC




8 discrete inputs

115 V ac field voltage sources




INPUTSNumber of channels ..........................................................8OFF voltage............................................................< 34 V acON voltage ............................................................> 84 V acWetting current ................................2 mA (nom.) @ 115 V acMax. input voltage ................................................130 V acFrequency ............................................................50 / 60 Hz


RESPONSE TIMEI/O response timeField event to new data available on Railbus.............33 ms (max.)

Railbus

µP

Channel 1 of 8

115V AC

N

L


Class 1, Div 2 8610-FT-NA 8611-FT-FUor Zone 2 Non-arching † Non-arching,hazardous areas fused


FIELD TERMINAL

† External fusing of the Field Power supply is recommended in order toprotect the field wiring.

Page 70 of 287

208002302

Image


June 2004


POWER SUPPLIESRailbus (12V) current........................................40 mA (typ.)...........................................................................60 mA (max.)Bussed Field Power ......................................115 V ac ±10%Frequency ............................................................50 / 60 Hz


8 discrete inputs

for dry contact switches.

115 V ac provided on input high side



115 V ac Bussed Field Power required


INPUTSNumber of channels ..........................................................8OFF current ...........................................................< 0.56 mAON current ..............................................................> 1.4 mAWetting current ................................2 mA (nom.) @ 115 V ac



115 V ac, non-isolated, module powered 8112-DI-AC


115 VacBussed Field Power

Railbus

µP

LN

Channel 1 of 8

† Alternative fusing in the field wiring is recommended if it is not providedin the field terminal.

General purpose 8604-FT-FU 8602-FT-STFused Standard †

Class 1, Div 2 8611-FT-FU 8610-FT-NAor Zone 2 Non-arcing, Non-arcing †hazardous areas Fused


FIELD TERMINAL

Page 71 of 287

208002302

Image


June 2004



8 discrete isolated inputs

230 V ac field voltage sources




INPUTSNumber of channels ..........................................................8OFF voltage............................................................< 68 V acON voltage ..........................................................> 168 V acWetting current ................................1 mA (nom.) @ 230 V acMax. input voltage ................................................265 V acFrequency ............................................................50 / 60 Hz





230 V ac, isolated, sinking 8113-DI-AC

Railbus

µP

Channel 1 of 8

230V AC

N

L

† External fusing of the Field Power supply is recommended in order toprotect the field wiring.


Class 1, Div 2 8610-FT-NI 8611-FT-FUor Zone 2 Non-arcing † Non-arcing,hazardous areas fused


FIELD TERMINAL

Page 72 of 287

208002302

Image


June 2004



8 discrete inputs

for dry contact switches.

230 V ac provided on input high side



230 V ac Bussed Field Power required


INPUTSNumber of channels ..........................................................8OFF current ...........................................................< 0.28 mAON current ............................................................> 0.71 mAWetting current ................................1 mA (nom.) @ 230 V ac



POWER SUPPLIESRailbus (12V) current........................................40 mA (typ.)...........................................................................60 mA (max.)Bussed Field Power .....................................207 to 265 V acFrequency ............................................................50 / 60 Hz


230 V ac, non-isolated, module powered 8114-DI-AC

230 VacBussed Field Power

Railbus

µP

LN

Channel 1 of 8

† Alternative fusing in the field wiring is recommended if it is not provided inthe field terminal.




FIELD TERMINAL

Page 73 of 287

208002302

Image


June 2004


8-channel Discrete Output

8 powered outputs

controls solenoids and relays

common load supply of up to 60 V dc

discrete or pulsed outputs

1A per channel switched current

2–60 V dc bussed field power required


OUTPUTSNumber of channels ..........................................................8Output voltage range...........................................2–60 V dcON voltage drop ..............................................0.25 V (max.)OFF leakage current .......................................1.0 mA (max.)Switched current per channel ††Continuous *.......................................................................1 AFor < 100 ms......................................................................4 AFor < 20 ms........................................................................6 A

CONFIGURABLE PARAMETERSOutput initialisation state ............................predefined valueFail-safe..........................................predefined value/last valueOutput ........................discrete, momentary or continuous pulse‡Pulse width .......................................................2 ms to 130 s

†† The total instantaneous switched current should not exceed the following:10 A for < 100 ms18 A for < 20 ms

*Limited to 6 A per module‡Consult GE Fanuc for availability

RESPONSE TIMEResponse timeFrom Railbus command to output change ....................1 ms (max.)

POWER SUPPLIESRailbus (12V) current........................................45 mA (typ.)...........................................................................70 mA (max.)Bussed Field Power ...........................................2 to 60 V dc


2–60 V dc, non-isolated, module powered 8115-DO-DC

Railbus

µP

2 - 60 VdcBussed Field Power

Channel 1 of 8

Load

+

–





FIELD TERMINAL

Page 74 of 287

208002302

Image


June 2004


Railbus

µP

20 - 265 VacBussed Field Power

LN

N

L

Channel 1 of 8

Load


8 powered outputs


common load supply of up to 265 V ac


1A per channel maximum

20–265 V ac bussed field power required


OUTPUTSNumber of channels ..........................................................8Output voltage range.......................................20–265 V acFrequency ............................................................50 / 60 HzON voltage drop.......................................................< 1.2 VOFF leakage current ..................................................< 4mASwitched current per channel †Continuous........................................................................1 A*For < 100 ms......................................................................5 AFor < 20 ms......................................................................20 AMinimum load current, per channel@ 115 V ac....................................................................11 mA@ 230 V ac......................................................................5 mA

† Stated figures are for operation with unfused field terminal. Whenoperating with 2 A fused field terminal part no. 8604-FT-FU, maximumswitched current is 5 A inrush for <10 ms pulse width at 0.1% duty cycleand <108 operations

*Limited to 3 A per module. ‡Consult GE Fanuc for availability


RESPONSE TIMEResponse time (max.) ......2 ms + 1¼2 cycle of mains frequency

(From Railbus command to output change)

POWER SUPPLIESRailbus (12V) current........................................75 mA (typ.)..........................................................................125mA (max.)Bussed Field Power (voltage) .......................20 to 265 V ac

MECHANICALModule Key Code .............................................................F1Module width .............................................................42 mmWeight ..........................................................................220 g

20–265 V ac, non-isolated, module powered 8116-DO-AC





FIELD TERMINAL

Page 75 of 287

208002302

Image


June 2004



8 fully isolated semiconductor switched outputs


for load supplies of up to 60 V dc


1A per channel switched


OUTPUTSNumber of channels ..........................................................8Output voltage range...........................................2–60 V dcON voltage drop ..............................................0.25 V (max.)OFF leakage current .......................................1.0 mA (max.)Switched current per channelContinuous..........................................................................1 AFor < 100ms .......................................................................4 AFor < 20ms .........................................................................6 A


RESPONSE TIMEResponse timeFrom Railbus command to output change ....................3 ms (max.)

‡Consult GE Fanuc for availability

POWER SUPPLIESRailbus (12V) current.........................................45 mA (typ.)...........................................................................70 mA (max.)Bussed Field Power ............................................not required


2–60 V dc, isolated, unpowered 8117-DO-DC

Railbus

µP

Channel 1 of 8

Load

2 to60 V

Note: External fusing to protect field wiring is recommended.

General purpose 8604-FT-FU 8602-FT-STFused Standard

Class 1, Div 2 8611-FT-FU 8610-FT-NAor Zone 2 Non-arcing, Non-arcinghazardous areas Fused


FIELD TERMINAL

Page 76 of 287

208002302

Image


June 2004



8 fully isolated semiconductor switched outputs


for load supplies of up to 250 V ac


1A per channel maximum


OUTPUTSNumber of channels ..........................................................8Output voltage range.......................................20–265 V acFrequency ............................................................50 / 60 HzON voltage drop.......................................................< 1.2 VOFF leakage current .................................................< 4 mASwitched current per channel †Continuous........................................................................1 A*For < 100ms .......................................................................5 AFor < 20ms .......................................................................20 AMinimum load current, per channel@ 115 V ac....................................................................11 mA@ 230 V ac......................................................................5 mA

† Stated figures are for operation with unfused field terminal. When operatingwith 2 A fused field terminal part no. 8604-FT-FU, maximum switched currentis 5 A inrush for <10 ms pulse width at 0.1% duty cycle and <108 operations.

* Limited to 3 A per module. ‡Consult GE Fanuc for availability


RESPONSE TIMEResponse time (max.) ......2 ms + 1¼2 cycle of mains frequency

(From Railbus command to output change)

POWER SUPPLIESRailbus (12V) current.........................................75 mA (typ.).........................................................................125 mA (max.)Bussed Field Power ............................................not required

MECHANICALModule Key Code .............................................................F4Module width .............................................................42 mmWeight ..........................................................................220 g

20–265 V ac, isolated, unpowered 8118-DO-AC

Railbus

µP

Channel 1 of 8

Load

L

N

20 to265V AC

Note: External fusing to protect field wiring is recommended.

General purpose 8604-FT-FU 8602-FT-STFused Standard

Class 1, Div 2 8611-FT-FU 8610-FT-NAor Zone 2 Non-arcing, Non-arcinghazardous areas Fused


FIELD TERMINAL

Page 77 of 287

208002302

Image


June 2004

8123-PI-QU

Pulse Input Module

2-channel pulse/quadrature input

# $

%

&

' (

)

*

*

+ +

' #

$

!"# $% %!&

,- . !/0

1

'2

#% "#

'( ) *

'( !

+ ! ,("%!

) *

!

!

+%# %)!

*

31,

%! %!

2 input channels with power supplies or single quadrature input

1 Hz to 50 kHz signal capability

frequency & acceleration measurement

2-alarm/repeater retransmitted output channels

2- and 3-wire pulse transmitter format

pulse counting (with gate control)

channels independently configurable

open circuit, short circuit and missing pulse detection

MODULE SPECIFICATION

See also System and Common Module Spec.

INPUTSPULSE/FREQUENCYNumber of channels ..........................................................2Frequency range........................................................50 kHz(in quadrature mode) ...................................................12.5 kHzAccuracy (25°C).............................................± 0.05% of spanTemperature Stability .......................................0.005% / °C

CONTROL GATE (for gating Channel 1 only)Switching thresholds..................................1.2 mA / 2.1 mAInput impedance ...........................................................1 kΩSupply voltage ......................................8.1 V (nom.) at 8 mA

SENSOR INPUT CHARACTERISTICSNAMUR 1Switching thresholds..................................1.2 mA / 2.1 mAInput impedance ...........................................................1 kΩSupply voltage ......................................8.1 V (nom.) at 8 mACURRENTInput signal .......................................................20 mA (max.)Threshold .............................................configurable in 8 levelsInput impedance...........................................................25 ΩOpen circuit current ...............................................< 0.5 mAShort circuit current..............................................> 21.5 mAVOLTAGEInput signal ........................................0 - 24 V dc (50 V max.)Threshold .............................................configurable in 8 levelsInput impedance ......................................................> 10 kΩSwitching hysteresis................................................ 100 mVSWITCHInput voltage range ...........................................0 – 10 V dc

OUTPUTSThe outputs are open-collector type for separately powereddevices such as LED clusters, annunciators or solenoidsNumber of channels ..........................................................2OFF state voltage ................................................30 V (max)OFF state leakage current ..................................10µA (max)ON state voltage drop.................................<1.0V @ 50 mAON state current.......................................................100 mARetransmission bandwidth .............................1 – 2000 Hz

Page 78 of 287

208002302

Image


June 2004

8123-PI-QU

Pulse Input Module


CONFIGURABLE PARAMETERSINPUTSChannel ........................................................enable / disableSensor type..........NAMUR prox. type (select low / high speed).....................................................................current pulse input....................................................................voltage pulse input.............................................................................switch inputFrequency ranges... 0.1, 0.3, 0.5, 1, 3, 5, 10, 30, 50, 100* kHzSample period ...............................................20 ms to 200 sQuadrature ..................................................enable / disableThreshold level .........................................user defined valuesTriggering ........................................rising edge / falling edgeFiltering................................................off, 1, 5, 20, 100 kHzAlarms...............................................frequency / accelerationAlarm limits ..........................................................high / lowAlarm deadband (hysteresis) ..................user defined valueLine fault detect ...........................................enable / disableChannel status..............................................active / inactiveCounter .........................................................enable / disableCounting direction ..............................count up / count down*While measurements can be made in the upper half of this range,the stated accuracy applies only to frequencies up to 50 kHz.

DISCRETE OUTPUT

Function selection ....................................................disabled.....................................................................high / low alarm...................................................................acceleration alarm.....................................................counter preset value reached............................................quadrature output (channel 1 only).......................................scaled retransmission (channel 1 only)Retransmission scaling (K factor – channel 1 only) ....1 – 256

AUXILIARY DISCRETE INPUTCounter (channel 1)..................................start (count)/pause

DYNAMIC DATA (READ ONLY)PROCESS VALUESFrequency.......................................................16 bit unsignedCount..................................................................32 bit signedAcceleration.......................................................16 bit signedSTATUS VALUESFrequency / acceleration alarms .......................High / low ..................................................................missing pulse detectLine fault detect ..........................................open/short circuitQuadrature direction..............1 =clockwise, 2 =anti-clockwiseCounter alarms.......................................preset value reached

CONTROL DATA (WRITE ONLY)Counter preset value ........................................32 bit signed.................................................load preset value = 0 to disableCounter commands..................................start / stop / resetNote: Channel 1 counter can also be controlled by control gateinput: 1= start (count), 0 = pause

ISOLATIONAny channel to Railbus .........................................100 V ac

Between input channels...........none (common 0V connection)

Between output channels ........................................30 V ac

RESPONSE TIMES

Signal change to availability on Railbus........25 ms (max.)

POWER SUPPLIESRailbus current (both channels @22 mA).....300 mA (max.)Bussed field power .......................20 mA @ 24 ± 10% V dc Power dissipation (both channels @22 mA) ..2.8 W (max.)(no load) ..............................................................2.0 W (max.)

MECHANICALModule Key Code.............................................................F2Module width.............................................................42 mmWeight..........................................................................260 g

TERMINAL ASSIGNMENTS

1 Current input2 Voltage input3 NAMUR input Channel #14 Common5 Power supply +ve6 Power supply +ve7 Current input8 Voltage input Channel #29 NAMUR input10 Common 11 NAMUR gate/control input12 Common

Channel #113 Output +ve14 Output –ve15 Output +ve

Channel #216 Output –ve

Terminal Description

General Purpose 8602-FT-STStandard

Class 1, Div 2 8601-FT-NIor Zone 2 Non-incendive

hazardous area

Field wiring Recommended Field Terminal

FIELD TERMINALS

Page 79 of 287

208002302

Image


June 2004

8123-PI-QU

Pulse Input Module


SAFETYField wiring protection.....................................non-incendive

FM and ATEX Cat 3 NON-INCENDIVE FIELD WIRINGPARAMETERS

The following figures are for Gas Groups A/B (IIC) unless otherwise stated.

Current inputs (Ch1 & Ch2).......................................Uo ≤ 0.6 V, Io ≤ 0.5 mA, Po ≤ 75 µW...................................................Ca = 1000 µF, La = 1000 mH3-wire current inputs (Ch1 & Ch2)..............................Uo 30 V, Io ≤ 102.5 mA, Po ≤ 765.7 mW............................Ca = 0.165 µF, La = 6 mH, La/Ra = 82 µH/ΩVoltage inputs (Ch1 & Ch2)...................................Uo ≤ 5.5 V, Io ≤ 0.58 mA, Po ≤ 0.8 mW.....................................................Ca = 535 µF, La = 1000 mH3-wire voltage inputs (Ch1 & Ch2)..............................Uo ≤ 30 V, Io ≤ 102.6 mA, Po ≤ 765.8 mW.........................Ca = 0.165 µF, La = 6 mH, La/Ra = 82.1 µH/Ω

NAMUR inputs (Ch1 & Ch2)....................................Uo ≤ 9.1 V, Io ≤ 10.6 mA, Po ≤ 24 mW.........................................................Ca = 20 µF, La = 490 mHNAMUR gate input (Ch1)....................................Uo ≤ 9.1 V, Io ≤ 10.6 mA, Po ≤ 24 mW.........................................................Ca = 20 µF, La = 490 mHDiscrete outputs (Ch1 & Ch2)Each pair of field terminals may be considered as non-incendivewhen connected into a field circuit with the following parameters........................Vmax=30 Vdc, Imax=100 mA, Ci=0 µF, Li=0 mH

LED INDICATORS

POWER – Green LED

FAULT – Red LED

PULSE INPUT CHANNEL – Yellow LED

Channel active but in alarm condition

DIGITAL OUTPUT CHANNEL – Yellow LED

Power failure Power OK Not applicable

OFF ON FLASHING

In running state Fault Awaiting module training

OFF ON FLASHING

Channel inactive Channel active and Channel active but in

operating normally alarm condition

OFF ON FLASHING

Channel inactive Channel active and Not applicable

operating normally

OFF ON FLASHING

Page 80 of 287

208002302

Image

32-Channel Discrete Input

Switch/Proximity Detector Inputs, Module Powered 8125-DI-DC

Features:

• 32 input channels• For Dry Contact Switches or Proximity Detectors• Pulse Counting and Latching Option• 24 Vdc bussed field power required• Line fault detection on all inputs (switch inputs need resistors)

SPECIFICATIONSSee also System and Common Module SpecificationNumber of Channels ............................................................32

INPUT SPECIFICATIONOFF current.................................................................<1.2 mAON current ..................................................................>2.1 mAShort Circuit Current .............................................8.6 mA (typ)Output Resistance..................................................950 Ω (typ)Open Circuit output voltage .................................8.2V dc (typ)Line Fault Detection

Short Circuit .....................................................<100 ΩOpen Circuit .....................................................<50 µA

Input voltage range without damage ................. 0 to +12 V dcIsolation ( channel to Railbus) ...................................250 V acInput sampling rate( all 32) .............................................8 kHzInput Pulse Width ................................................250 µS (min)DI Counting frequency without loss....................500 Hz (max)Applicable Specification ...........................NAMUR, DIN 19234

CONFIGURABLE PARAMETERSInput Filter..............................0 to 8.192 secs in 250 µS stepsPulse Counting ................................................................on/offLatching ...........................................................................on/off

RESPONSE TIMEInput Module Scan Time ...............................................<1 mS(Inputs sampled at 8kHz and processed every 1 mS)

SAFETYFM non-incendive field wiring parameters ( each channel)Voc ≤ 8.64 V; Isc ≤ 18.5 mA; Ca ≤ 28 µF; La ≤ 23.6 mH

POWER SUPPLIESRailbus(12V) current ....................................................<50 mABussed Field Power ..........................190 mA (max) at 24V dc

MECHANICALModule Key Code..............................................B3 Non ArcingModule Width ................................................................42 mmWeight ............................................................................185 g

FIELD TERMINAL

Field Wiring

General Purpose

Class 1, Div 2Or Zone 2Hazardous area

RecommendedField Terminal

8617-FT-NI30 channel DI

8617-FT-NI30 channel DI

MassField Terminal

8619-FT-MT32 channel DI

8619-FT-MT32 channel DI

Safe area or Zone 2/Div 2 hazardous area

Page 81 of 287

208002302

Image

Features:

• 32 channel module, configurable channel by channel as DI, SOE or both

• Switch or Proximity Detector Inputs• Captures events with 1/4 ms resolution• Distributed architecture provides

accurate event recording• Line fault detection on all inputs

(switch inputs need resistors)• 24 Vdc bussed field power required• Module provides power to all field inputs,

simplifying field wiring• High time stamp resolution for more

accurate event sequencing• Log data from other events, including

controller status and module alarms• Export data to PC applications for reporting

or further analysis

32 Channel Sequence ofEvents 8127-DI-SENon-Isolated, Module-Powered

Sequence of Events (SOE recording is need-ed to capture both the first event and thesequence of a number of events thatoccurred during a shut-down or trip sequencein order to better understand the cause of theevent. When this occurs, events can takeplace very rapidly throughout your processarea. The SOE Modules and companionEvent Logger Software provide a means ofrecording these events and use highly accu-rate time stamps to determine the preciseorder in which they occurred.

8127-DI-SE is a 32-channel SOE modulewhose primary focus is to monitor the status ofdigital inputs and record state changes to aninternal buffer. The state changes are time-stamped to the nearest 1/4 millisecond. Oncerecorded the states the state data is periodi-cally transferred to the controller. Each mod-ule has a buffer size of 512 events which thecontroller can empty in about 500 ms, captur-ing approximately 1000 events per second.

SOE Event Logger SoftwareSOE event logger software is provided with allMOST Workbench products. The event loggersoftware collects time stamped data from thecontroller, merges information from multiplecontrollers into a chronological journal andexports the data to standard event viewers,including Wonderware's InTouch. Other dataexport options include OPC Event format or abasic text file.

The event logging software can also be usedto record other events in addition to SOEactivity. For example, it could be used torecord changes of state in the controller, suchas when control switches between redundantcontrollers. It could be used to record whenan analog limit has been exceeded or when adigital module changes state. This powerfulcapability enables you to record all the criticalevents in your process, providing you with acomplete picture for further analysis.

Benefits• More accurate event sequencingAll logged events are time stamped using 1/8ms resolution for 1/4 ms accuracy. TheController uses Network Time Protocol(NTP) to assure time stamp accuracybetween modules across the network.When using NTP, all controllers are syn-chronized across the network to ± 3 ms,resulting in very accurate event sequenc-ing.• Identify problems quicklyEach SOE input has a unique line fault detec-tion feature that detects whether there is ashort circuit or open circuit on each input.Problems are identified immediately for correc-tion, saving considerable maintenance time.• Simplifies field wiringField circuits are module-powered, eliminatingthe need to "daisy chain" power supply wiring atfield terminals. Field circuits are powered with aminimum of wiring and termination effort.• Locate SOE modules in the processLike the rest of the control platform, SOEmodules can be located in your process, next

to your field devices in order to record eventslocally on a more reliable & timely basis.• Easy integration with other applicationsEvents from multiple modules and controllerscan be stored in a single SOE Event Logger pro-viding an easy interface to other applications.

32 Discrete ChannelsThe 8127-DI-SE has 32 discrete input chan-nels and each channel can be configured aseither an SOE input or a standard discreteinput. SOE input signals can also be used asstandard discrete inputs as part of any con-trol strategy. Each module can buffer up to512 events. Events are communicated to thecontroller, which uses Network Time Protocol(NTP) to accurately convert the module's timestamp data to real time. The SOE EventLogger, which constantly polls the controllerfor new events (typically every 2 seconds),collects each time-stamped event. Afterrecording the events, the Event Logger sendsand acknowledgement to the controller,which then clears the event from its memory.The controller retains all events until all activeEvent Loggers acknowledge them. MultipleEvent Loggers can be used for redundantevent recording and will always have consis-tent time stamps since all events are timestamped by the controller.

Events are displayed by the SOE dataRetrieval Client. Following data retrieval, theuser can select to email the SOE data, Printit or Save it to a CSV file. The user can eas-ily create a custom report, selecting thecolumns to be viewed and printed.

32-Channel Sequence Of Events

Non-Isolated, Module-Powered 8127-DI-SE

Page 82 of 287

208002302

Image

MODULE SPECIFICATIONSee also System and Common Module SpecificationNumber of Channels ............................................................32 (Each DI channel can be configured with or without SOE)INPUT SPECIFICATIONOFF current.................................................................<1.2 mAON current ..................................................................>2.1 mAShort Circuit Current .............................................8.6 mA (typ)Output Resistance..................................................950 Ω (typ)Open Circuit output voltage ................................8.2 V dc (typ)Line Fault Detection

Short Circuit .....................................................<100 ΩOpen Circuit .....................................................<50 µA

Input voltage range without damage ................. 0 to +12 V dcIsolation ( channel to Railbus) ...................................250 V acInput sampling rate( all 32) .............................................8 kHzInput Pulse Width ................................................250 µS (min)DI Counting frequency without loss....................500 Hz (max)Applicable Specification ...........................NAMUR, DIN 19234

SOE SPECIFICATIONModule Event Buffer…………………480 Events+32 OverflowEvent Recording peak rate, module.............64000 events/secDuration of peak rate...........................................7.5 ms (max)

(for 32 SOE channels enabled)Event Recording continuous rate, module 220 events/sec (min)Each of 32 inputs .....................................6.8 events/sec (min)Excessive Event Threshold (for 32 inputs) ......150 events/sec

.......................................................(for each channel)SOE Module time stamping resolution .........................125 µSSystem Time Stamping resolution ................................250 µSSimultaneous Inputs, Time Stamping error

Within one module ...............................0.25 ms (max)Within one 8000 Node............................1.0 ms (max)Between 8000 Nodes...............................5.0 ms (typ)(Absolute time stamping accuracy will depend on Network Time Reference in use)

CONFIGURABLE PARAMETERSSOE Logging....................................Configurable per channelInput Filter..............................0 to 8.192 secs in 250 µS stepsPulse Counting ................................................................on/offLatching ...........................................................................on/off

RESPONSE TIMEInput Module Scan Time ...............................................<1 mS(Inputs sampled at 8KHz and processed every 1 mS)

SAFETYFM non-incendive field wiring parameters ( each channel)Voc ≤ 8.64 V; Isc ≤ 18.5 mA; Ca ≤ 28 µF; La ≤ 23.6 mH

POWER SUPPLIESRailbus(12V) current ....................................................<50 mABussed Field Power .........................190 mA (max) at 24 V dc

MECHANICALModule Key Code..............................................B3 Non ArcingModule Width ................................................................42 mmWeight ............................................................................185 g

FIELD TERMINALS

32-Channel Sequence Of Events

Non-Isolated, Module-Powered 8127-DI-SE

Field Wiring

General Purpose

Class 1, Div 2Or Zone 2Hazardous area

RecommendedField Terminal

8617-FT-NI30 channel SOE

8617-FT-NI30 channel SOE

MassField Terminal

8619-FT-MT32 channel SOE

8619-FT-MT32 channel SOE

Safe area or Zone 2/Div 2 hazardous area

Page 83 of 287

208002302

Image


June 2004

8201-HI- IS

SAFETYField wiring protection.........................................[EEx ia] IICSafety description (each channel)..........................................Uo = 28 V, Io = 93 mA, Po = 0.65 WFM entity parameters....................VOC ≤ 28 V dc, ISC ≤ 93 mA.....................................................Ca ≤ 0.14 µF, La ≤ 4.38 mH

POWER SUPPLIESIS Railbus (12V) current (all channels @ 22 mA)...........................................................................600 mA (typ.)Power dissipation within module ...................4.2 W (max.)




Hazardous areaZone 0/Div 1

Intrinsically safe standard 8621-FT-IS

Intrinsically safe loop disconnect 8622-FT-IS

Field wiring type Recommended Field Terminal

FIELD TERMINAL


intrinsically safe field circuits

conventional 4–20 mA

HART pass-through


for 2-wire transmitters

in-built power supply


INPUTSNumber of channels ..........................................................8Nominal signal range (span) .............................4 to 20 mAFull signal range...............................................0.5 to 22 mALine fault detection Short circuit current ...................................................> 21.5 mAOpen circuit current.....................................................< 0.5 mAVoltage to transmitter @ 20mA ..........................15 V (min.)Accuracy (@25 °C) ....................................................± 20 µAResolution ...................................................................16 bitsTemperature Stability(– 40 °C to +70 °C) .............................± 0.006% of span per °CIsolation(any channel to Railbus) .................................................60 V ac(between channels in same module) .....................................none

CONFIGURABLE PARAMETERSAlarms..........................................high, high-high, low, low-lowAlarm deadband (hysteresis) ...................user defined valueInput filter time constant ...........................user defined valueInput dead zone .........................................user defined valueDrive on failsafe.........................................user defined valueChannel status............................................... active /inactiveHART comms ................................................. enable /disable

RESPONSE TIMEAnalog signal change to availability on Railbus4–20 mA mode .....................................................33 ms (max.)HART mode ..................................................0.75 s per channel

4–20 mA with HART®


#

Railbus

Channel 1 of 8

4-20mA

HHC

Page 84 of 287

208002302

Image


June 2004

8230-AI- IS


0-10V/potentiometer input



0–10V/100Ω–10kΩ potentiometer

0/4 - 20mA current input with additional burden resistor

true zero on voltage input

open circuit field wiring detection


INPUTSNumber of channels ......................................8, single-ended0–10V input characteristicsNominal signal range (span) ........................................0 to 10 VFull signal range .......................................................0 to +11 VResolution.......................................................................16 bitsInput impedance .........................................................> 100 kΩUnder-range indication .................................................–100 mVPotentiometer input characteristicsNominal signal range (span) .........................0 to 100 % of travelPotentiometer resistance.......................................100Ω to 10 kΩExcitation voltage (nom.)......................10 V (from 2.2 kΩ source)Resolution ( ≥1kΩ potentiometer )......................................14 bitsResolution (100Ω potentiometer ) ......................................11 bitsAccuracy (at 25°C) .........................................± 0.1% of spanIsolation(any channel to Railbus) ...............................................100 V ac(between channels).............................................................none

CONFIGURABLE PARAMETERSInput type (per channel) ......................voltage/potentiometerAlarms................................................................high and lowAlarm deadband (hysteresis)....................user defined valueInput filter time constant ...........................user defined valueInput dead zone .........................................user defined valueDrive on open circuit............... disabled /upscale /downscaleChannel status................................................ active/inactiveLead compensation ....................................user defined value

RESPONSE TIMESignal change to availability on Railbus ........33 ms (max.)Open circuit line fault detection time ..........................≤ 5 s

SAFETYField wiring protection..........................................[EExia] IICSafety description (each channel - non linear output) .................................................Uo ≤ 15.75 V, Io ≤ 20 mA, Po ≤ 0.315 WFM entity parameters...................Voc = 15.75 V, Isc = 20 mA..........................................................Ca = 0.22 µF, La = 5 mH

POWER SUPPLIESIS Railbus (12V) currentTypical .........................................................................200 mAMax with voltage/current inputs .....................................250 mAMax. with 100Ω potentiometer inputs .............................350 mAPower dissipation within moduleMax with voltage/current inputs...........................................3 WMax. with 100Ω potentiometer inputs................................4.2 W

MECHANICALModule Key Code ............................................................C4Module width .............................................................42 mmWeight..........................................................................200 g

Intrinsically safe, standard 8623-FT-IS

FIELD TERMINAL




#

Railbus

Channel 1 of 8

0 10VDC

0/420mA

250/500 R

Page 85 of 287

208002302

Image


June 2004

Safe areaZone 2/Div 2 hazardous area


8205-TI - IS



Thermocouple and mV

Intrinsically safe THC 8625-FT-IS

FIELD TERMINAL

8 input channels


thermocouple and mV

cold junction compensation (internal or remote)

built-in thermocouple linearisation


open-circuit field wiring detection


INPUTSNumber of channels ..........................................................8THC inputs .................B,E,J,K,N,R,S or T to EN 60584-1: 1995;................................................W3 and W5 to ASTM E 988-96..................................Russian K and Russian L to rOCT 3044-84.....................................user definable linearisation table, note 1

In addition, see error table in System specification sectionAccuracy (% of span)

Temperature drift . . . . . . . . . . . . . .< ± 0.003% of span/°CCold junction compensation error*< ± 1°C (– 40 to + 70°C)Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16 bitsCommon mode rejection . . . . . . . . . .> 87 dB @ 50/60 HzSeries mode rejection...........................> 50 dB @ 50/60 HzCommon mode voltage between channels .....± 5 V (max.)Absolute maximum input voltage ...........................± 30 VIsolation (any channel to Railbus).......................60 V peak

CONFIGURABLE PARAMETERSSensor type ......................................................user selectableAlarms ................................................................high and lowInput dead zone .........................................user defined valueSelectable input filtering......off /2 reading avg./running avg.Drive on open circuit fault ........ disabled/upscale/downscaleChannel status .................................................active/inactiveCold junction compensation ........enable/disable/channel no.

RESPONSE TIMEAnalog signal change to availability on Railbus..........................................................................600 ms (max.)

SAFETYField wiring protection.........................................[EEx ia] IICSafety Description (each channel)Channels 1, 2, 3, 4, 7 and 8, wired as separate IS circuits .....................................Uo = 16.4 V, Io = 79 mA, Po = 0.33 WChannels 5 and 6, wired as separate IS circuits........................................Uo = 1 V, Io = 1.1 mA, Po = 0.3 mW(Input terminals are equivalent to non-energy storing apparatus)FM entity parameters ..........................................................Channels 1, 2, 3, 4, 7 and 8, wired as separate IS circuits ...............................Voc = 16.4 V, Isc = 63.7 mA, Po = 131mWChannels 5 and 6, wired as separate IS circuits.........................................Uo = 1 V, Io = 1 mA, Po = 0.25 mW

POWER SUPPLIESIS Railbus (12V) current.................................120 mA (max.)Power dissipation within module ...................1.5 W (max.)



#

Railbus

Channel 1 of 8

CJ

mV

Thermocouples: B 0 to + 1820°C

E – 270 to + 1000°C

J – 210 to + 1200°C

K – 270 to + 1372°C

N –270 to + 1300°C

R & S – 50 to + 1768.1°C

T – 270 to + 400°C

W3 & W5 0 to + 2315°C

Russian K -200 to + 1300°C

Russian L -200 to + 800°C

mV – 8 to + 24 mV

– 20 to + 60 mV

– 33.333 to + 100 mV

– 100 to + 100 mV

Input type Range

* Cold junction compensation located in recommended field terminal.

Tamb mV inputs THC inputs

Note 1: Consult GE Fanuc for support in BIM/configurator.

25°C ± 0.05% ± 0.05%

+10 to + 40°C ± 0.08% ± 0.1%

– 40 to + 70°C ± 0.18% ± 0.3%

Page 86 of 287

208002302

Image


June 2004

8 input channels


RTD and Ω

2-, 3- and 4-wire RTD format


channels are o/c failure independent


INPUTSNumber of channels ..........................................................8RTD inputs......................................................(2-, 3- or 4-wire)..........................................Pt100, Pt500 to BS EN60751: 1996....................................................Ni120 to DIN 43 760: 1985........................................................jPt100 to JIS C1604: 1981.....................................user definable linearisation table, note 1RTD input

Resistance input

Accuracy (% of span), see note 2

Cable resistance per loop ..................................50 W (max) RTD excitation current ....................................211 µA (nom.)Compliance voltage of current source .......................6.8 VResolution ...................................................................16 bitsSeries mode rejection...........................> 50 dB @ 50/60 HzIsolation (any channel to Railbus).......................60 V peak

Note 1: Consult GE Fanuc for support in BIM/configurator.Note 2: For Pt500 and 0 to 2000 Ω ranges a deviation of 0 to + 0.1% ofreading is to be added for channel 1 or any channel preceded by a lowerresistance range.




#

Railbus

Channel 1 of 8

CONFIGURABLE PARAMETERSSensor type ......................................................user selectableAlarms ................................................................high and lowInput dead zone .........................................user defined valueSelectable input filtering......off /2 reading avg./running avg.Drive on open circuit fault ...... disabled /upscale /downscaleChannel status................................................active/ inactiveOffset (2-wire RTD mode)..........................user defined value

RESPONSE TIMESignal change to availability on Railbus ......600 ms (max.)

SAFETYField wiring protection.........................................[EEx ia] IICSafety Description (all channels combined)............................................................Uo = 16.4 V, Io = 217 mA, Po = 0.9 WFM entity parameters.........................Voc = 16.4 V dc , Isc = 350 mA, Po = 718 mW



RTD and ΩΩ 8206-TI - IS

Intrinsically safe RTD 8626-FT-IS

FIELD TERMINAL


RTDs: Pt100, Pt500 – 200 to + 850°C

jPt100 – 200 to + 650°C

Ni120 – 60 to + 250°C

Input type Range

211 µA 0 to 110 Ω

211 µA 0 to 280 Ω

211 µA 0 to 470 Ω

48 µA 0 to 2000 Ω

Excitation current Range

25°C ± 0.05%

+10 to + 40°C ± 0.1%

– 40 to + 70°C ± 0.2%

Tamb (RTD & ΩΩ inputs)

Page 87 of 287

208002302

Image


June 2004


8202-HO-IS 4–20 mA with HART®

8 single ended output channels


4–20 mA for I/P converters


HART pass-through



OUTPUTSNumber of channels ..........................................................8Nominal signal range (span) .............................4 to 20 mAFull signal range..................................................1 to 22 mAVoltage to load .......................................13 V min. @ 20 mALoad resistance ............................................0 to 650 Ω max.Accuracy (@ 25 °C) ...................................................± 20 µATemperature stability(– 40°C to + 70 °C) .............................± 0.006% of span per °C Resolution ...................................................................12 bitsOpen circuit detection threshold....................> 685 Ω (typ.)(also detects loads greater than driveable range)Isolation(any channel to Railbus) .................................................60 V ac(between channels).............................................................none

CONFIGURABLE PARAMETERSOutput initialisation state............................predefined valueDrive on “fail-safe” ............... upscale /downscale /last valueChannel status............................................... active /inactiveHART variable and status reporting ...........enable/disable

RESPONSE TIMERailbus command to output change4-20 mA mode ....................................................20 ms (typ.) ..........................................................................80 ms* (max.)HART mode.....................................................1 s per channel

*Time to reach 90% level for 4--20 mA step into 650 Ω load

SAFETYLocation of moduleField wiring protection ........................................[EEx ia] IICSafety description(each channel) .............Vo = 24.6 V, Io = 93 mA, Po = 0.57 WFM entity parameters ................VOC ≤ 24.6 V dc, ISC ≤ 93 mA.......................................................Ca ≤ 0.42 µF, La ≤ 4.2 mH

POWER SUPPLIESIS Railbus (12V) current (all channels @ 22 mA into 650 Ω load) .........................630 mAPower dissipation within module...................4.1 W (max.)

MECHANICALModule Key Code ............................................................A4Module width .............................................................42 mmWeight..........................................................................265 g

Intrinsically safe standard 8621-FT-IS

Intrinsically safe loop disconnect 8622-FT-IS


FIELD TERMINAL



#

Railbus

Channel 1 of 8

4-20mAP

I

HHC

Page 88 of 287

208002302

Image


June 2004



Intrinsically safe, loop disconnect 8622-FT-IS




8204-AO-IS 4–20 mA

8 single ended output channels

intrinsically safe

conventional 4–20 mA

for I/P converters



OUTPUTSNumber of channels ..........................................................8Nominal signal range (span) .............................4 to 20 mAFull signal range..................................................1 to 22 mAVoltage to load........................................13 V min. @ 20 mALoad resistance ...................................................450 Ω max.Accuracy (@ 25°C) ....................................................± 20 µATemperature stability(– 40°C to + 70°C) ..............................± 0.006% of span per °CResolution ...................................................................12 bitsOpen circuit detection threshold...............0.7 mA ± 0.2 mAIsolation(any channel to Railbus) .................................................60 V ac(between channels).............................................................none

CONFIGURABLE PARAMETERSOutput initialisation state ............................predefined valueDrive on “fail-safe” ............... upscale /downscale /last valueChannel status............................................... active /inactive

RESPONSE TIMERailbus command to output change..............................................................................25 ms (typ.)............................................................................80 ms (max.)

SAFETYField wiring protection.........................................[EEx ia] IICSafety description(each channel)..............Vo = 24.6 V, Io = 93 mA, Po = 0.57 W

POWER SUPPLIESIS Railbus (12V) current (all channels @ 22 mA)..................................................530 mAPower dissipation within module ...................3.8 W (max.)


FIELD TERMINAL

#

Railbus

Channel 1 of 8

4-20mAP

I

Page 89 of 287

208002302

Image


June 2004






simple apparatus, dry contacts or IS proximity detectors

open and short-circuit field wiring detection


INPUTSNumber of channels ........................................................16OFF current .............................................................< 1.2 mAON current ..............................................................> 2.1 mASwitching hysteresis .......................................200 µA (nom.)Applicable specifications .......................NAMUR, DIN19234Voltage applied to sensor.......7.0 to 9.0 V from 1 kΩ ±10%Output (wetting) current@ 100Ω line impedance................................................ > 6 mALine fault detectionShort circuit ................................................................< 100 ΩOpen circuit .................................................................> 90 kΩMaximum input frequency in pulse counting mode ..............................................20 HzMinimum pulse width detected .................................45 ms

CONFIGURABLE PARAMETERSSelectable input filter .......................fast, slow or user defined (User defined permits 0 to 512 ms values in 3ms steps)Latch inputs ....................................................enable /disableLatch polarity................................latch on high / latch on lowPulse counting ...............................................enable /disableLine fault detection........................................enable /disable

RESPONSE TIMEField event to availability on Railbus................6 ms (max.)

SAFETYField wiring protection.........................................[EEx ia] IICSafety Description (each channel)(each channel) .............Uo = 10.5 V, Io = 14 mA, Po = 0.04 WFM Entity parameters ................VOC ≤ 10.5 V dc, ISC ≤ 14 mA........................................................Ca ≤ 2.67 µF, La ≤ 176 mHIsolation(any channel to Railbus) .................................................60 V ac(channels arranged in two groups of eight, with returns commonedwithin each group)

POWER SUPPLIESIS Railbus (12V) current(16-channel mode) ..............................................350 mA (max.)(8-channel mode) ................................................285 mA (max.)


Switch/proximity detector 8220-DI- IS

Intrinsically safe, 16-channel 8623-FT-IS

Intrinsically safe, 8-channelloop disconnect 8624-FT-IS


FIELD TERMINAL

#

Railbus

#Channel 1

of 16

Resistors are requiredfor line fault detection.

680Ω

22kΩ

Page 90 of 287

208002302

Image


June 2004




Solenoid driver, IIC gas groups 8215-DO-IS

4 single-ended output channels


solenoid valves and alarms or LED indicators

line-fault detection


OUTPUTSNumber of channels ..........................................................4Minimum output voltageOpen circuit ......................................................................22 V45 mA load ......................................................................11 VMaximum output voltage ............................................25 VCurrent limit per channel..................................45 mA (min.)Output supply ripple....................<0.5% of output (pk. to pk.)Line fault detectionShort circuit ...................................................................< 15 ΩOpen circuit .................................................................> 13 kΩIsolation(any channel to Railbus) .................................................60 V ac(between channels).............................................................none

CONFIGURABLE PARAMETERSOutput initialisation state......................................high /lowOutput state on “fail-safe”...................high /low /last valueChannel status............................................... active /inactiveOperation mode.............................................static /dynamicOutput ...................discrete /momentary pulse /continuous pulsePulse width .......................................................2 ms to 130 sDuty cycle ............................2 ms to 130 s (0.01% to 99.99%)Line fault detection........................................enable /disable

RESPONSE TIMERailbus command to output change .................10 ms (typ.)

SAFETYField wiring protection.........................................[EEx ia] IICSafety description (each channel) ..................Vo = 25 V, Io = 110 mA, Po = 0.69 WFM Entity parameters .................VOC ≤ 25 V dc, ISC ≤ 110 mA.......................................................Ca ≤ 0.19 µF, La ≤ 3.15 mH




Intrinsically safe, loop disconnect 8622-FT-IS


FIELD TERMINAL

#

Railbus

#Channel 1 of 4

Solenoidalarm orother IS

11

15

2022

5

Output current (mA)

Minimumoutputvoltage

(V)

10 20 30 40 50

Page 91 of 287

208002302

Image


June 2004

8223-PI- IS

Pulse Input Module

2-channel pulse input

!"# $% %!&

,- . !/0

40 .) !/

1

'2

#% "#

'( ) *

'( !

+ ! ,("%!

) *

!

!

+%# -+%)!

*

31,

-+ -+

2 input channels with power supplies or single quadrature input

1 Hz to 50 kHz signal capability

frequency & acceleration measurement

2 alarm/repeater retransmitted output channels

2- and 3-wire pulse transmitter format

pulse counting (with gate control)


open circuit, short circuit and missing pulse detection

MODULE SPECIFICATION

See also System and Common Module Spec.PULSE/FREQUENCYNumber of channels ..........................................................2Frequency range........................................................50 kHz(in quadrature mode) ...................................................12.5 kHzAccuracy (25°C).............................................± 0.05% of spanTemperature Stability .......................................0.005% / °C

CONTROL GATE (for gating Channel 1 only)Switching thresholds..................................1.2 mA / 2.1 mAInput impedance ...........................................................1 kΩSupply voltage ......................................8.1 V (nom.) at 8 mA

SENSOR INPUT CHARACTERISTICSNAMUR 1Switching thresholds .................................1.2 mA / 2.1 mAInput impedance ..........................................................1 kΩSupply voltage .....................................8.1 V (nom.) at 8 mACURRENTInput signal ......................................................20 mA (max.)Threshold ............................................configurable in 8 levelsInput impedance ..........................................................25 ΩOpen circuit current ..............................................< 0.5 mAShort circuit current.............................................> 21.5 mAVOLTAGEInput signal .......................................0 - 24 V dc (50 V max.)Threshold ............................................configurable in 8 levelsInput impedance .....................................................> 10 kΩSwitching hysteresis............................................... 100 mVSWITCHInput voltage range...........................................0 – 10 V dc

OUTPUTSThe outputs are open-collector type for separately powered IS devicessuch as LED clusters, annunciators or solenoidsNumber of channels .........................................................2OFF state voltage ...............................................30 V (max)OFF state leakage current .................................10µA (max)ON state voltage drop ................................<1.0V @ 50 mAON state current......................................................100 mARetransmission bandwidth ............................1 – 2000 Hz

Page 92 of 287

208002302

Image


June 2004

8223-PI- IS

Pulse Input Module


CONFIGURABLE PARAMETERSINPUTSChannel ........................................................enable / disableSensor type..........NAMUR prox. type (select low / high speed)....................................................................current pulse input...................................................................voltage pulse input.............................................................................switch inputFrequency ranges... 0.1, 0.3, 0.5, 1, 3, 5, 10, 30, 50, 100* kHzSample period ...............................................20 ms to 200 sQuadrature ..................................................enable / disableThreshold level .........................................user defined valuesTriggering ........................................rising edge / falling edgeFiltering................................................off, 1, 5, 20, 100 kHzAlarms...............................................frequency / accelerationAlarm limits ..........................................................high / lowAlarm deadband (hysteresis) ..................user defined valueLine fault detect ...........................................enable / disableChannel status..............................................active / inactiveCounter .........................................................enable / disableCounting direction ..............................count up / count down*While measurements can be made in the upper half of this range, thestated accuracy applies only to frequencies up to 50kHz.

DISCRETE OUTPUT

Function selection ....................................................disabled.....................................................................high / low alarm...................................................................acceleration alarm.....................................................counter preset value reached............................................quadrature output (channel 1 only).......................................scaled retransmission (channel 1 only)Retransmission scaling (K factor – channel 1 only) ....1 – 256

CONTROL GATE INPUTCounter (channel 1)..................................start (count)/pause

DYNAMIC DATA (READ ONLY)PROCESS VALUESFrequency.......................................................16 bit unsignedCount..................................................................32 bit signedAcceleration.......................................................16 bit signedSTATUS VALUESFrequency / acceleration alarms .......................High / low ..................................................................missing pulse detectLine fault detect ..........................................open/short circuitQuadrature direction ...........1 = clockwise, 2 = anti-clockwiseCounter alarms.......................................preset value reached

CONTROL DATA (WRITE ONLY)Counter preset value ........................................32 bit signed.................................................load preset value = 0 to disableCounter commands..................................start / stop / resetNote: Channel 1 counter can also be controlled by control gateinput: 1= start(count), 0 = pause

ISOLATIONAny channel to Railbus ...........................................60 V acBetween input channels...........none (common 0V connection)Between output channels ........................................30 V ac

RESPONSE TIMES

Signal change to availability on Railbus........25 ms (max.)

POWER SUPPLIESRailbus current (both channels @22 mA).....300 mA (max.)Power dissipation (both channels @22 mA) ..2.8 W (max.)(no load) ..............................................................2.0 W (max.)

MECHANICALModule Key Code.............................................................F2Module width.............................................................42 mmWeight..........................................................................260 g

TERMINAL ASSIGNMENTS

SAFETYField wiring protection......................................[EEx ia] IIC**[EEx ia] IIB with BEI Optical EncoderThe following figures are for Gas Groups A/B (IIC) unless otherwise stated.24V TX supplies (Ch1 & Ch2)...............................Uo = 27.4 V, Io = 93.2 mA, Po = 639 mW

1 Current input2 Voltage input3 NAMUR input Channel #14 Common 5 Power supply +ve6 Power supply +ve7 Current input8 Voltage input Channel #29 NAMUR input10 Common 11 NAMUR gate/control input12 Common

Channel #113 Output +ve14 Output –ve15 Output +ve

Channel #216 Output –ve

Terminal Description


FIELD TERMINAL


Page 93 of 287

208002302

Image


June 2004

8223-PI- IS

Pulse Input Module


....................................................Co = 0.087 µF, Lo = 4.2 mH Current inputs (Ch1 & Ch2)...................................Uo = ± 1.1 V, Io = 53 mA, Po = 15 mW.............................................................Ui = 1.1 V, Ii = 50 mA...................................................Co = 1000 µF, Lo = 13.1 mH Voltage inputs (Ch1 & Ch2)NAMUR inputs (Ch1 & Ch2)NAMUR gate input (Ch1)......................................Uo = 9.6 V, Io = 25 mA, Po = 57 mW.......................................................Ui = 18.2 V, Pi = 333 mW......................................................Co = 3.6 µF, Lo = 56.6 mH Discrete outputs (Ch1 & Ch2)..........................................................Ui = 30 V, Pi = 333 mWAll circuits combined within one channelUo = 28.5 V, Io = 93.2 mA (or 169mA at 13.4V), Po = 639 mW..................................................Co = 0.078 µF, Lo = 1.28 mH

FM ENTITY PARAMETERS 24V TX supplies (Ch1 & Ch2) ...............................Uo = 27.4 V, Io = 93.2 mA, Po = 639 mW......................................................Ca = 0.08 µF, La = 4.1 mH 24V TX supplies (Ch1 & Ch2 connected togther)Gas Groups C,E (IIB)...............................Uo = 27.4 V, Io = 186.4 mA, Po = 1.28 W......................................................Ca = 0.67 µF, La = 4.3 mH Current inputs (Ch1 & Ch2)................................Uo = 1.2 V, Io = 57.4 mA, Po = 17.2 mW...................................................Ca = 1000 µF, La = 10.6 mH 3-wire current inputs (Ch1 & Ch2)Gas Groups C,E (IIB).............................Uo = 27.4 V, Io = 150.6 mA, Po = 656 mW......................................................Ca = 0.67 µF, La = 6.4 mH Voltage inputs (Ch1 & Ch2)................................Uo = 9.56 V, Io = 1.0 mA, Po = 2.39 mW.....................................................Ca = 3.7 µF, La = 1000 mH 3-wire voltage inputs (Ch1 & Ch2)...............................Uo = 27.4 V, Io = 93.2 mA, Po = 642 mW......................................................Ca = 0.08 µF, La = 4.0 mH

NAMUR inputs (Ch1 & Ch2)NAMUR gate input (Ch1)..............................Uo = 9.56 V, Io = 11.1 mA, Po = 26.4 mW.......................................................Ca = 3.7 µF, La = 263 mH Discrete outputs (Ch1 & Ch2)............................................................Ui = 30 V, Ii = 100 mA................................................................Ci = 0 µF, Li = 0 mH

LED INDICATORSPOWER – Green LED

FAULT – Red LED

PULSE INPUT CHANNEL – Yellow LED

DIGITAL OUTPUT CHANNEL – Yellow LED

Power failure Power OK Not applicable

OFF ON FLASHING

In running state Fault Awaiting module training

OFF ON FLASHING

Channel inactive Channel active and Channel active but in

operating normally alarm condition

OFF ON FLASHING

Channel inactive Channel active and Not applicable

operating normally

OFF ON FLASHING

Page 94 of 287

208002302

Image

GE Fanuc Intelligent Platforms

8000 Process I/O 8000 Process I/O is the latest addition to GE Fanuc Intelligent Platforms’ line up of I/O products. Designed to meet the rugged environmental specifications required in process environments, 8000 Process I/O helps you keep your critical operations running allowing you to improve your operational performance and productivity for a sustainable advantage.

Environmental & Hazardous Area Operation 8000 Process I/O can go where other I/O cannot. It can be field mounted and subjected to the following: –40°C to +70°C operating range ISA Level G3 corrosion 30G shocks and 5G vibration Operation in Class I, Division 2 and

Zone 2 hazardous areas with field wiring extending into Division 1 and Zone 1/0 areas

HART Support 8000 Process I/O can pass HART information from smart field devices to controllers or a separate PC workstation running asset management software applications to remotely manage smart instrument configuration and calibration.

Network Redundancy Network redundancy helps assure stable and consistent communications. The Ethernet Bus Interface

Modules (BIM) have two high speed Ethernet ports that use Fault Tolerant Ethernet to provide redundant communications

Each port can be connected to an independent LAN which is continuously monitored for its integrity. If the primary port detects a network failure, traffic is immediately switched to the other LAN to maintain full communications

The Profibus BIM supports full LAN redundancy

Ordering Information

Bus Interface Modules & Carriers Part Number Description Part Number Description

8410-NS-PS Node services power supply monitor (Ethernet BIM) 8521-EB-MT Ethernet BIM

8505-BI-MB Modbus BIM 8701-CA-BI MultiBIM Carrier 8507-BI-DP Profibus Version of the MultiBIM 8718-CA-NS BIM only carrier

8510-MO-NS Configuration Memory Module (Modbus & Profibus BIMs) 8750-CA-NS Carrier, simplex or redundant, power monitoring

8000 General Purpose I/O Part Number Description Part Number Description 8101-HI-TX 8-channel AI, 4-20mA with HART 8116-DO-AC 8-channel DO, 20-250Vac non-isolated, module powered 8102-HO-IP 8-channel AO, with HART, 4-20mA 8117-DO-DC 8-channel DO, 2-60Vdc isolated, unpowered 8103-AI-TX 8-channel AI, 4-20mA 8118-DO-AC 8-channel DO, 20-250Vac isolated, unpowered 8104-AO-IP 8-channel AO, 4-20mA 8119-VI-05 8-channel Voltage Input, 1-5Vdc 8105-TI-TC 4-channel THC/mV input 8121-DI-DC 16-channel DI, 24Vdc non-isolated, module powered 8106-TI-RT 4-channel RTD input 8122-DI-DC 16-channel DI, 24Vdc isolated, sinking 8109-DI-DC 8-channel DI, 24Vdc isolated, sinking 8123-PI-QU 2-channel Pulse Quadrature Input

8110-DI-DC 8-channel DI, 24Vdc non-isolated, module powered 8125-DI-DC 32-channel DI, non-isolated, module-powered

8111-DI-AC 8-channel DI, 115Vac isolated, sinking 8127-DI-SE 32-channel SOE module

8112-DI-AC 8-channel DI, 115Vac non-isolated, module powered 8129-IO-DC 8-channel supervised DI/DO

8113-DI-AC 8-channel DI, 230Vac isolated, sinking 8132-AI-UN 8-channel Isolated Universal AI

8114-DI-AC 8-channel DI, 230Vac non-isolated, module powered 8133-HI-TX 8-channel supervised AI with HART

8115-DO-DC 8-channel DO, 2-60Vdc non-isolated, module powered

Page 95 of 287

Ordering Information (Continued) Field Terminals and Accessories Part Number Description Part Number Description 8601-FT-NI Field terminal, non-incendive (Div 2) 8610-FT-NA Field terminal, non-arcing (Div 2) 8602-FT-ST Field terminal, standard 8611-FT-FU Field terminal, non-arcing, fused (Div 2) 8603-FT-FU Field terminal, non-incendive, fused (Div 2) 8615-FT-4W Field terminal, 4wire (current sinking) 8604-FT-FU Field terminal, fused 8617-FT-NI Field Terminal, non-incendive, for 16 ch DI 8605-FT-TC Field terminal, thermocouple 8618-FT-MT 16-pin Mass Termination Assembly (Div 2) 8606-FT-RT Field terminal, RTD 8619-FT-MT 44-pin Mass Termination Assembly (Div 2) 8607-FT-TC Field terminal, 8-channel with T/C 8650-FT-PX 32-channel PX/Switch FTA for 8125/7 8608-FT-NI Field terminal, 8-channel, non-incendive 8000 I/O Carriers Part Number Description Part Number Description 8707-CA-08 8 module carrier 8710-CA-04 4 module carrier 8709-CA-08 8 module carrier, 64-address system 8000 I/O Carrier Cables Part Number Description Part Number Description 8020-CE-RH Carrier extender, right hand 8080-FC-10 16-pin cable for 8618 (1m) 8021-CE-LH Carrier extender, left hand 8081-FC-20 16-pin cable for 8618 (2m) 8041-CC-35 Carrier extension cable, 0.35m 8082-FC-30 16-pin cable for 8618 (3m) 8042-CC-85 Carrier extension cable, 0.85m 8085-FC-10 20 + 24 pin cables for 8619 (1m) 8043-CC-12 Carrier extension cable, 1.2m 8086-FC-20 20 + 24 pin cables for 8619 (2m) 8044-CC-20 Carrier extension cable, 2m 8087-FC-30 20 + 24 pin cables for 8619 (3m) 8000 I/O Power Supplies and Components Part Number Description Part Number Description 8413-FK-DN 8913/4 PS DIN Rail Mounting Kit 8914-PS-AC 10A 24VDC A/C Input P/S 8414-FK-SU 8913/4 PS Surface Mounting Kit BQ2320-9R-EX 24 to 12VDC Voltage Converter 8913-PS-AC 5A 12VDC & 5A 24VDC A/C Input P/S

8000 Intrinsically Safe I/O

Part Number Description Part Number Description

8201-HI-IS 8-channel IS AI, 4-20mA with HART 8215-DO-IS 4-channel IS DO, solenoid driver IIC gas groups

8202-HO-IS 8-channel IS AO, 4-20 mA with HART 8220-DI-IS 8/16-channel IS DI, switch/promixmity detector

8204-AO-IS 8-channel IS AO, 4-20 mA 8223-PI-IS 2-channel IS Pulse Counter, 1 ch Quadrature w/ DI/DO (MB only)

8205-TI-IS 8-channel IS THC/mV input 8230-AI-IS 8-channel IS AI, 0-10V, pot., 0-20mA/4-20mA, sinking

8206-TI-IS 8-channel IS RTD input

IS Field Terminals and Accessories


8621-FT-IS IS Field terminal, standard 8624-FT-IS IS Field terminal with loop-disconnect for 8-channel DI only

8622-FT-IS IS Field terminal, loop-disconnect (not for 8 channel DI) 8625-FT-IS IS Field terminal, THC

8623-FT-IS IS Field terminal for 8220-DI-IS 16 ch DI & V/Pot inputs 8626-FT-IS IS Field terminal, RTD

8000 IS Carrier / Cables


8030-CE-RH IS Carrier extender, right hand 8014-CC-20 IS extension cable, 2.0m

8031-CE-LH IS Carrier extender, left hand 8016-CC-35 IS Power extension cable, 0.35m

8011-CC-35 IS Signal extension cable, 0.35m 8017-CC-85 IS Power extension cable, 0.85m



8000 IS Power Supplies and Accessories


8724-CA-PS IS Module Power Supply Carrier 8920-PS-DC IS Module DC Power Supply (8 modules)

8725-CA-RB Railbus Isolator Carrier with Power Fail Monitor 8922-RB-IS Railbus Signal Isolator

GE Fanuc Intelligent Platforms Information Center Headquarters: 1 800 GEFANUC 1 800 322 2616 1 434 978 5100 Global Regional phone numbers Are available on our website www.gefanuc.com © 2008 GE Fanuc Intelligent Platforms, Inc. All Rights Reserved. *Trademark of GE Fanuc Intelligent Platforms, Inc. All other brand names or names are property of their respective holders.

Additional Resources For more information, please visit the GE Fanuc Intelligent Platforms website at: www.gefanuc.com

Page 96 of 287


June 2004EUROPE (EMEA) Tel: +44 (0)1582 723633 Fax: +44 (0)1582 422283AMERICAS Tel: +1 603 926 0090 Fax: +1 603 926 1899ASIA PACIFIC Tel: +65 487 7887 Fax: +65 487 7997E-mail: [email protected] Web site: www.mtl-inst.com


8000 2/x System specification

System specification

MECHANICALMounting method...................................Flat panel or DIN-railDIN-rail types ................‘Top hat’, 35 x 7.5 mm to EN 50022....................................................or 35 x 15 mm to EN 50022........................................................or G-section, to EN 50035

RAILBUS (Backplane)Maximum physical length* of node ..........................6.8 mMaximum number of extender cables ............................3* overall, including backplanes and extender cables

NODE SIZEBIM/Controller type Module limit

8502-BI-DP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 max.8505-BI-MB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 max.8521-xx-MT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 max.

Note: I/O module carriers used with these must conform to the samemodule address limits. See I/O module carrier datasheets for details.

ELECTRICALEMC compliance ..................................To BS EN 61326:1998 Electrical safety ................................................. EN 61010-1

ISOLATION

I/O Modules - 2/2

Between isolated channels....250 V ac rms (to EN 61010-1)...........................................................(Tested at 2.3 kV ac rms)Channel (any) to Railbus .................................250 V ac rms(Except where stated on individual module specifications)

I/O Modules - 2/1

Between hazardous area terminals and Railbus ..........60 V ac rmsBetween IS field circuits of separate I/O modules† ...500 V ac rmsBetween any IS field circuit & non-IS field circuit .......250 V ac rmsBetween individual channels of an I/O module ..................................................................refer to individual module specifications† 60 second test

ENVIRONMENTALAmbient tempOperating, optimum orientation * .....................– 40°C to + 70°C(except where stated in individual module specifications)Operating, non-optimum orientation * ...............– 40°C to + 50°C(except where stated in individual module specifications) Storage..........................................................– 40°C to + 85°C* Optimum orientation is when the carrier is mounted in a verticalplane with field terminals located below the modules.

Relative Humidity .....................5 to 95% RH (non-condensing)Ingress Protection .........................IP20 to BS EN60529:1992(Additional protection by means of enclosure)Corrosive atmospheres: Designed to meet ten year service inClass G3 corrosive environment, as defined by ISA StandardSP71.04.

EN 60068-2-6 10-500 Hz. (Sinusoidal Vibration) 5 g for surface mounting,

1 g for DIN-rail mounting

BS2011:Part 2.1 20-500 Hz(Random Vibration) 5 g for surface mounting


Vibration - Storage & Transport

EN 60068-2-6 10-500 Hz. (Sinusoidal Vibration) 5 g for surface mounting,


BS2011:Part 2.1 20-500 Hz(Random Vibration) 5 g for surface mounting


Vibration - Operating

EN 60068-2-32 1 m drop onto flat concrete,

Shock - Storage & Transport

EN 60068-2-27 30 g peak acceleration with11 ms pulse width

Shock - Operating

IMPORTANTUsers are strongly recommended to refer to the System Specifier’s Guide (SSG8002) when designing a new system

Page 97 of 287

208002302

Stamp






HAZARDOUS AREA APPROVALS - 2/2 NODE

8000 node equipment location*.......................Safe area or..............................................Zone 2, IIC T4 hazardous area or......................Class 1, Div 2, Groups A-D, T4 hazardous location*except for 8101-HI-TX, 8103-AI-TX and 8119-VI-05.............................................................................Safe area or Zone 2, IIC T4 (Tamb = 60°C), T3 (Tamb = 70°C), hazardous area or............................Class 1, Div 2, Groups A-D, T4 (Tamb = 60°C), ..........................................T3 (Tamb = 70°C) hazardous locationField equipment and wiring location.............................................................................Safe area or...................................................Zone 2, IIC hazardous area or...........................Class 1, Div 2, Groups A-D hazardous location(Temperature classification will be determined by the field apparatus)

HAZARDOUS AREA APPROVALS - 2/1 NODE

8000 node equipment location ........................Safe area or..............................................Zone 2, IIC T4 hazardous area or......................Class 1, Div 2, Groups A-D, T4 hazardous locationField equipment and wiring location...................................................Zone 0, IIC hazardous area or...........................Class 1, Div 1, Groups A-D hazardous location(Temperature classification will be determined by the field apparatus)

Applicable standards:

Factory Mutual Research Co., Class No. 3611 for Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, D hazardous locations

Factory Mutual Research Co., Class No. 3610 for Class I, II, III,Division 1, 2 Groups A-G hazardous locations

EN 50014: 1992 Electrical apparatus for potentially explosiveatmospheres, general requirements

EN 50020: 1995 Electrical apparatus for potentially explosive atmospheres, intrinsically safe “i”

EN 50021: 1999 Electrical apparatus for potentially explosive atmospheres, type of protection “n”

EC Directive 94/9/EC (ATEX 100A)

LOCAL AREA NETWORK

Fieldbus protocols supported.................Modbus (RTU mode).............................................................................Profibus - DPNote

1. Protocols are selected by choice of Bus Interface Module

2. For other protocols consult GE Configuration

1) via host LAN (if supported by LAN)

2) via PC connected locally at configuration port

Node address setting ..................Software settable in the BIMLAN physical medium (configurable on carrier) ...............LAN A.................................................RS485 or RS422, 5- wireLAN B (where available)........................RS485 or RS422, 5- wireLAN isolationLAN A to LAN B (if applicable).....................................250 V acLAN A or B to system ground .................250 V ac (to EN 61010)

POWER SUPPLIES

System SupplyLocal supply input ........................................18.5 - 36 V dc inputSupply redundancy .................................................... supportedRailbus supply voltage...........................................12 V dc ± 5%

System specification

IMPORTANTUsers are strongly recommended to refer to the System Specifier’s Guide (SSG8002) when designing a new system

Page 98 of 287

208002302

Stamp





2/2 module cable parameters for non-incendive field wiring


Module FM

(each channel) Gas Group Ca (µF) La (mH)

8101-HI-TX A+B 0.17 11

C 0.51 33

D 1.36 88

8102-HO-IP A+B 0.17 11

C 0.51 33

D 1.36 88

8103-AI-TX A+B 0.17 11

C 0.51 33

D 1.36 88

8104-AO-IP A+B 0.17 11

C 0.51 33

D 1.36 88

8105-TI-TC A+B 14.9 1000

C 44.8 1000

D 119.6 1000

8106-TI-RT A+B 14.9 1000

C 44.8 1000

D 119.6 1000

8110-DI-DC A+B 0.12 151

C 0.36 544

D 0.97 1000

8119-VI-05 A+B 0.17 11

C 0.51 33

D 1.36 88

8121-DI-DC A+B 0.12 1000

C 0.36 1000

D 0.97 1000

8123-PI-QU A+B 1000 1000

C 1000 1000

D 1000 1000

NoteFor module types 8109-DI-DC and 8122-DI-DC, each pair offield terminals may be considered as non-incendive whenconnected into a field circuit with the following parameters:

Vmax = 30 V dc Imax = 100 mA.

The values of capacitance and inductance seen at themodule’s input terminals are:

Ci = 0 µF Li = 0 mH.

For the latest certification information visit : www.gefanuc.com

Page 99 of 287

208002302

Stamp





2/1 module cable parameters for IS field wiring


Module BASEEFA FM

(each channel) Gas Group µF mH or µH/ΩΩ Gas Group Ca (µF) La (mH)

8201-HI-IS IIC 0.083 4.3 56 A+B 0.14 4.38

IIB 0.65 17.72 210 C 0.43 17.2

IIA 2.15 36.02 444 D 1.14 34.2

8202-HO-IS IIC 0.116 4.3 64 - - -

IIB 0.87 17.7 239 - - -

IIA 3.12 36 505 - - -

8204-AO-IS IIC 0.136 4.80 71 A+B 0.21 4.67

IIB 1.00 19.61 265 C 0.64 18.3

IIA 3.60 40.04 558 D 1.70 36.5

8205-TI-IS Channels 1, 2, 3, 4, 7 and 8 wired as separate IS circuit

IIC 0.41 5.8 62 A+B 0.41 8.5

IIB 2.49 23.8 227 C 2.44 32.4

IIA 9.98 49.1 480 D 9.98 69.2

Channels 5 and 6 wired as separate IS circuit

IIC 100 1000 1100 A+B 1000 1000

IIB 100 1000 1100 C 1000 1000

IIA 100 1000 1100 D 1000 1000

8206-TI-IS IIC 0.389 0.39 20 A+B 0.39 0.3

IIB 2.47 1.5 90 C 2.47 1.3

IIA 9.96 4.2 182 D 9.96 2.42

8215-DO-IS IIC 0.11 3.08 53 A+B 0.19 3.15

IIB 0.84 13.02 205 C 0.56 12.5

IIA 2.97 26.12 432 D 1.51 24.5

8220-DI-IS IIC 2.41 175 983 A+B 2.67 176

IIB 16.80 680 1333 C 8.00 633

IIA 75.00 1000 1333 D 21.3 1000

8223-PI-IS IIC 0.078 1.28 15 A+B 1000 10.6

IIB 0.627 3.86 56 C 1000 40.4

IIA 2.05 10.29 119 D 1000 87.1

8230-AI-IS IIC 0.47 87.5 334 - - --

IIB 2.88 328 952 - - --

IIA 11.6 633 952 - - -

For the latest certification information visit: www.gefanuc.com

Page 100 of 287

208002302

Stamp





Characterisation errors for module 8205-TI-IS


Thermocouple type Characterisation error Temperature range

+ 0 to – 42 °C 0 to + 42 °C

+ 0.3 to – 0.6 °C + 42 to + 109 °C

B + 0.1 to – 0.11 °C + 109 to + 200 °C

± 0.06 °C + 200 to + 1000 °C

± 0.11 °C + 1000 to + 1820 °C

+ 0.45 to – 0.1 °C – 270 to – 264 °C

E + 0.05 to – 0.07 °C – 264 to – 237 °C

± 0.04 °C – 237 to + 1000 °C

J ± 0.04°C – 210 to + 1200 °C

+ 0 to – 2.0 °C – 270 to – 265 °C

K ± 0.15 °C – 265 to – 200 °C

± 0.06 °C – 200 to – 100 °C

± 0.04 °C – 100 to + 1372 °C

N + 0 to – 2.3 °C – 270 to – 265 °C

± 0.15 °C – 265 to – 200 °C

± 0.06 °C – 200 to – 100 °C

± 0.04 °C – 100 to + 1372 °C

+ 0.72 to – 0 °C – 50 to – 49 °C

R ± 0.06 °C – 49 to + 1 °C

± 0.04 °C + 1 to +1768.1 °C

S + 0.92 to – 0 °C – 50 to – 49 °C

± 0.04 °C – 49 to + 1768.1 °C

T + 0 to – 2.0 °C – 270 to – 265 °C

± 0.04 °C – 265 to + 400 °C

W3 ± 0.06 °C 0 to + 2315 °C

W5 ± 0.055 °C 0 to + 2315 °C

Russian K + 0.25 to – 0 °C – 200 to – 199 °C

± 0.04 °C – 199 to +1300 °C

Russian L ± 0.032 °C – 200 to + 800 °C

Page 101 of 287

208002302

Stamp





2/2 system approvals for mounting and field wiring

I/O modules

Div 2 installation non-incendive

apparatus suitable forinstallation

in Class1,Div2,Grps A-D

Zone 2 installation and field wiring

ATEX Category II 3 G

Code Certificate Nos.Class

Standard

Approved for

Certificate Nos.

Part numbers & descriptions


apparatus suitable forinstallation in

Class 1, Zone 2/Div 2,

Grp IIC

Zone 2 installation and field wiring


Note 1 EN50021 was available only in draft form (pr) when this apparatus was certified. When EN50021 was finally published, the designation EEx nV had been changed to EEx nA for non-arcing apparatus. EEx nV is equivalent to EEx nA.

Note 2 In Europe, the preferred term is "Energy Limited". See EN50021.Note 3 For +60°C the T class may be reduced to T4. T3 only applies for an ambient temperature of +70°C.Note 4 These products are listed in the document 8000-1 "ATEX Documentation for ancillary components used with the 8000 Zone 2 System".

Standard

Approved for

prEN50021 & EN500211 Class No. 3611 C22.2 No.213

Certificate Nos.

8101-HI-TX 8-channel AI,4-20mA with HART Non-incendive2 EEx n L IIC T33 MTL00ATEX8101 1B3A9.AX 152423-2500007251

8102-HO-IP 8-channel AO,4-20mA with HART Non-incendive2 EEx n L IIC T4 MTL00ATEX8102 1B3A9.AX 152423-2500007251

8103-AI-TX 8-channel AI,4-20mA Non-incendive2 EEx n L IIC T33 MTL00ATEX8103 1B3A9.AX 152423-2500007251

8104-AO-IP 8-channel AO,4-20mA Non-incendive2 EEx n L IIC T4 MTL00ATEX8104 1B3A9.AX 152423-2500007251

8105-TI-TC 4-channelTHC/mV input Non-incendive2 EEx n L IIC T41 MTL98ATEX8105 1B3A9.AX 152423-2500007251

8106-TI-RT 4-channelRTD input Non-incendive2 EEx n L IIC T41 MTL98ATEX8106 1B3A9.AX 152423-2500007251

8109-DI-DC 8-channel DI,24V dc isolated, sinking Non-incendive2 EEx n L IIC T41 MTL98ATEX8109 1B3A9.AX 152423-2500007251

8110-DI-DC 8-channel DI,24V dc non-isolated, module-powered Non-incendive2 EEx n L IIC T41 MTL98ATEX8110 1B3A9.AX 152423-2500007251

8111-DI-AC 8-channel DI,115V ac isolated, sinking Non-arcing EEx n VL IIC T41 MTL98ATEX8111 1B3A9.AX 152423-2500007251

8112-DI-AC 8-channel DI,115V ac non-isolated, module-powered Non-arcing EEx n VL IIC T41 MTL98ATEX8112 1B3A9.AX 152423-2500007251

8113-DI-AC 8-channel DI,230V ac isolated, sinking Non-arcing EEx n VL IIC T41 MTL98ATEX8113 1B3A9.AX 152423-2500007251

8114-DI-AC 8-channel DI,230V ac non-isolated, module-powered Non-arcing EEx n VL IIC T41 MTL98ATEX8114 1B3A9.AX 152423-2500007251

8115-DO-DC 8-channel DO,2-60V dc non-isolated, module-powered Non-arcing EEx n VL IIC T41 MTL98ATEX8115 1B3A9.AX 152423-2500007251

8116-DO-AC 8-channel DO,20-250V ac non-isolated, module-powered Non-arcing EEx n VL IIC T41 MTL98ATEX8116 1B3A9.AX 152423-2500007251

8117-DO-DC 8-channel DO,2-60V dc isolated, unpowered Non-arcing EEx n VL IIC T41 MTL98ATEX8117 1B3A9.AX 152423-2500007251

8118-DO-AC 8-channel DO,20-250V ac isolated, unpowered Non-arcing EEx n VL IIC T31&3 MTL98ATEX8118 1B3A9.AX 152423-2500007251

8119-VI-05 8-channel AI,1-5V dc Non-incendive2 EEx n L IIC T33 MTL00ATEX8119 1B3A9.AX 152423-2500007251

8121-DI-DC 16-channel DI,24V dc non-isolated, module-powered Non-incendive2 EEx n L IIC T4 MTL00ATEX8121 1B3A9.AX 152423-2500007251

8122-DI-DC 16-channel DI,24V dc isolated, sinking Non-incendive2 EEx n L IIC T4 MTL00ATEX8122 1B3A9.AX 152423-2500007251

8123-PI-QU 2-channel, pulse/quadratureinput Non-incendive2 EEx n L IIC T4 MTL01ATEX8123X 1B3A9.AX 152423-2500007251


EUROPE USA (FM) CANADA (CSA)


Page 102 of 287

208002302

Stamp







Field Terminals


apparatus suitable for installation in


Grp IIC


apparatus suitable forinstallationin Class1,

Zone2, Grp IIC

Zone 2 installations and field wiring


Code Certificate Nos. Certificate Nos. Certificate Nos.

8601-FT-NI field terminal,non-incendive - unfused - See note 4 1B3A9.AX 152423-2500007251

8602-FT-ST field terminal,standard - unfused - See note 4 1B3A9.AX 152423-2500007251

8603-FT-FU field terminal, non-incendive - fused - See note 4 1B3A9.AX 152423-2500007251

8604-FT-FU field terminal, standard - fused - See note 4 1B3A9.AX 152423-2500007251

8605-FT-TC field terminal RTD - See note 4 1B3A9.AX 152423-2500007251

8606-FT-RT field terminal thermocouple - See note 4 1B3A9.AX 152423-2500007251

8610-FT-NA field terminal, non-arcing - unfused - See note 4 1B3A9.AX 152423-2500007251

8611-FT-FU field terminal, non-arcing - fused - See note 4 1B3A9.AX 152423-2500007251

8615-FT-4W field terminal, 4-wire transmitter - See note 4 1B3A9.AX 152423-2500007251

8617-FT-NI field terminal, 16-channel - See note 4 1B3A9.AX 152423-2500007251

BIMs8410-NS-PS power supply monitor module - EEx nL IIC T4 MTL02ATEX8410X-01 1B3A9.AX

8502-BI-DP Profibus-DP BIM - EEx nVL IIC T41 MTL99ATEX8502 1B3A9.AX 152423-2500007251

8505-BI-MB Modbus BIM - EEx nVL IIC T41 MTL98ATEX8505 1B3A9.AX 152423-2500007251

8512-IF-HA HART interface module - EEx nA IIC T4 MTL00ATEX8512 1B3A9.AX 152423-2500007251

8510-MO-NS Node services module - EEx nL IIC T4 MTL01ATEX8510X 1B3A9.AX

8521-xx-xx Process Controller/EBIM - see Note 5 - EEx nL IIC T5 MTL02ATEX8521X 1B3A9.AX

Power Supply8910-PS-DC power supply, 18-36 V dc input - EEx nVL IIC T41 MTL98ATEX8910 1B3A9.AX 152423-2500007251

8913-PS-AC power supply, 85-264 V ac input,12/24 V dc output II3G EEx n A II T4 TÜV01ATEX1774X 3011821

8914-PS-AC power supply, 84-264 V ac input,24 V dc output II3G EEx n A II T4 TÜV01ATEX1774X 3011821

Class

Note 1 EN50021 was available only in draft form (pr) when this apparatus was certified. When EN50021 was finally published, the designation EEx nV had been changed to EEx nA for non-arcing apparatus. EEx nV is equivalent to EEx nA. Note 2 In Europe, the preferred term is "Energy Limited". See EN50021.Note 3 For +60°C the T class may be reduced to T4. T3 only applies for an ambient temperature of +70°C.Note 4 These products are listed in the document 8000-1 "ATEX Documentation for ancillary components used with the 8000 Zone 2 System".Note 5 The -xx-xx indicates a range of modules with the same initial digits in the part number

Standard

Approved for





Page 103 of 287

208002302

Stamp







Carriers


apparatussuitable for

installation in Class 1, Zone 2/Div 2,

Grp IIC


apparatus suitable for

installation in Class1, Zone2, Grp IIC

Zone 2 installations and field wiring


Code Certificate Nos. Certificate Nos. Certificate Nos.Class

Note 1 EN50021 was available only in draft form (pr) when this apparatus was certified. When EN50021 was finally published, the designation EEx nV had been changed to EEx nA for non-arcing apparatus. EEx nV is equivalent to EEx nA. Note 2 In Europe, the preferred term is "Energy Limited". See EN50021.Note 3 For +60°C the T class may be reduced to T4. T3 only applies for an ambient temperature of +70°C.Note 4 These products are listed in the document 8000-1 "ATEX Documentation for ancillary components used with the 8000 Zone 2 System".

Standard

Approved for


8707-CA-08 8-module carrier - See note 4 1B3A9.AX 152423-2500007251

8709-CA-08 8-module carrier See note 4 1B3A9.AX

8710-CA-04 4-module carrier - See note 4 1B3A9.AX 152423-2500007251

8711-CA-NS node services carrier,screw terminal LAN - See note 4 1B3A9.AX 152423-2500007251

8712-CA-NS node services carrier,sub-D terminal LAN - See note 4 1B3A9.AX 152423-2500007251

8715-CA-BI universal BIM carrier - See note 4 1B3A9.AX 152423-2500007251

8717-CA-PS 8910-PS-DC power supply carrier See note 4

8718-CA-NS BIM + node services module carrier See note 4 1B3A9.AX

8750-CA-NS redundant controllerand power fail module carrier - See note 4 1B3A9.AX

Carrier Extenders8020-CE-RH carrier extender, right-hand - See note 4 1B3A9.AX 152423-2500007251

8021-CE-LH carrier extender, left-hand - See note 4 1B3A9.AX 152423-2500007251

Extender Cables

8001-CC-35 signal extension cable,0.35m - See note 4 1B3A9.AX 152423-2500007251






Page 104 of 287

208002302

Stamp







I/O modules

Div 2 installation

non-sparkingapparatus

suitable for installation in


Grp IIC

Div 2installation

Non-incendiveapparatussuitable for

installation inClass1,Div2,

Grps A-D

Zone 2installations

ATEX CategoryII 3 G


Standard

Approved for

Class No. 3611

Class No.3610

CAN/CSA-E79-15-95

CAN/CSA-E79-11-95

prEN50021 & EN500211

IS field wiring forClass I,

Zones 0,1,Grp IIC

IS fieldwiring IS field

terminals for Classes,

I,II,III,Grps A-G

EN50014:1997 & EN500205:1994

IS field wiringATEX

Category II [1] G

8201-HI-IS 8-channel, 2000 152423-1000846XAI, 4-20 mA with HART EEx n L IIC T4 MTL99ATEX8201 [EEx ia]IIC BAS98ATEX 7207U 3001345 /Ex n A[ia] IICT48202-HO-IS 8-channel,AO, 4-20mA with HART EExn L IIC T4 MTL01ATEX8202X [EEx ia]IIC BAS01ATEX7185U 30013458204-AO-IS 8-channel, 2000 152423-1000846XAO, 4-20 mA EEx n L IIC T4 MTL99ATEX8204 [EEx ia]IIC BAS98ATEX 7205U 3001345 /Ex n A[ia] IICT48205-TI-IS 8-channel,THC/mV input EEx n L IIC T4 MTL00ATEX8205X [EEx ia]IIC BAS99ATEX7316U 3001345 TBA8206-TI-IS 8-channel,RTD input EEx n L IIC T4 MTL00ATEX8206 [EEx ia]IIC BAS99ATEX7316U 3001345 TBA8215-DO-IS 4-channel, DO, 2000 152423-1000846Xsolenoid driver, IIC gas groups EEx n L IIC T4 MTL99ATEX8215 [EEx ia]IIC BAS98ATEX 7204U 3001345 /Ex n A[ia] IICT48220-DI-IS16-channel, 2000 152423-1000846XDI, switch/proximity detector EEx n L IIC T4 MTL99ATEX8220 [EEx ia]IIC BAS98ATEX 7206U 3001345 /Ex n A[ia] IICT48223-PI-IS 2-channel, pulse/frequency input EEx n L IIC T4 MTL02ATEX8223X [EEx ia]IIC BAS00ATEX7202U 3008078230-AI-IS 8-channel,AI, 0-10V/potentiometer EExn L IIC T4 MTL02ATEX8230X [EEx ia]IIC BAS01ATEX7346U 3011951

FieldTerminals8621-FT-IS IS standard See note 6 [EEx ia] BAS98ATEX 7211U 3001345 2000 152423-1000846X

8622-FT-IS IS loopdisconnect See note 6 [EEx ia] BAS98ATEX7211U 3001345 2000 152423-1000846X

8623-FT-IS IS 16-channel See note 6 [EEx ia] BAS98ATEX 7211U 3001345 2000 152423-1000846X

8624-FT-IS IS 16-channel,DI, loop disconnect See note 6 [EEx ia] BAS98ATEX7211U 3001345 2000 152423-1000846X

8625-FT-IS IS THC See note 6 [EEx ia] BAS98ATEX 7211U 3001345 2000 152423-1000846X

8626-FT-IS IS RTD See note 6 [EEx ia] BAS98ATEX 7211U 3001345 2000 152423-1000846X

Railbusisolator8922-RB-IS Railbus 2000 152423-1000846Xisolator module EEx n L IIC T4 MTL99ATEX8922 [EEx ia] BAS98ATEX 7208U 3001345 / Ex n A IIC T4

Powersupply8920-PS-DC IS Power 2000152423-1000846Xsupply,18-36 V dc input EEx nV IIC T4 MTL99ATEX89204 [EEx ia] BAS98ATEX 7209U 3001345 / Ex n A IIC T4

Code Certificate Nos. Code Certificate Nos. Certificate Nos. Certificate Nos.

Note 1 Applies to railbus interfaceNote 2 The railbus interface and I/O field wiring are covered by a single certificate. The railbus interface code is ExnA. Note 3 The railbus interface and I/O field wiring are covered by a single certificate and no distinction is made between non-incendive and non-arcing

railbus interface connections. Note 4 EN50021 was available only in draft form when this apparatus was certified. When EN50021 was finally published, the designation

EEx nV had been changed to EEx nA for non-arcing apparatus. EEx nV is equivalent to EEx nA. Note 5 BASEEFA node certificate no BAS98ATEX 7202. BASEEFA system certificate no. Ex98E2203. Note 6 These products are listed in the document 8000-1 ‘ATEX Documentation for ancillary components used with the 8000 Zone 2 System’.



Page 105 of 287

208002302

Stamp







Carriers

Div 2 installation

non-sparkingapparatus

suitable for installation in


Grp IIC

Div 2installation

Non-incendiveapparatussuitable for

installation inClass1,Div2,

Grps A-D

Zone 2installations

ATEX CategoryII 3 G


Standard

Approved for

Class No. 3611

Class No.3610

CAN/CSA-E79-15-95

CAN/CSA-E79-11-95

prEN50021 & EN500211

IS field wiring forClass I,

Zones 0,1,Grp IIC

IS fieldwiringIS field

terminalsfor Classes

I,II,III Grps A-G

EN50014:1997 & EN500205:1994

IS field wiringATEX

Category II [1] G

Code Certificate Nos. Code Certificate Nos. Certificate Nos. Certificate Nos.

Note 1 Applies to railbus interfaceNote 2 The railbus interface and I/O field wiring are covered by a single certificate. The railbus interface code is ExnA. Note 3 The railbus interface and I/O field wiring are covered by a single certificate and no distinction is made between non-incendive and non-arcing

railbus interface connections. Note 4 EN50021 was available only in draft form when this apparatus was certified. When EN50021 was finally published, the designation

EEx nV had been changed to EEx nA for non-arcing apparatus. EEx nV is equivalent to EEx nA. Note 5 BASEEFA node certificate no BAS98ATEX 7202. BASEEFA system certificate no. Ex98E2203. Note 6 These products are listed in the document MTL8000-1 ‘ATEX Documentation for ancillary components used with the MTL8000 Zone 2 System’.


8727-CA-08 IS carrier,8 module See note 6 [EEx ia] BAS98ATEX 7210U 3001345 2000 152423-1000846X8720-CA-04 IS carrier,4 module See note 6 [EEx ia] BAS98ATEX 7210U 3001345 2000 152423-1000846X8723-CA-RB IS carrier,Railbus isolator See note 6 [EEx ia] BAS98ATEX 7208U 3001345 2000 152423-1000846X8724-CA-PS IS carrier,IS module power supply See note 6 [EEx ia] BAS98ATEX 7209U 3001345 2000 152423-1000846X8729-CA-08 IS carrier,8 module 64-address system See note 6 [EEx ia] BAS98ATEX 7210U 3001345

Carrierextenders

Extendercables8011-CC-35 IS carrierextension cable 0.35m See note 6 [EEx ia] BAS98ATEX 7210U 3001345 2000 152423-1000846X

8012-CC-85 IS carrierextension cable 0.85m See note 6 [EEx ia] BAS98ATEX 7210U 3001345 2000 152423-1000846X

8013-CC-12 IS carrierextension cable 1.2m See note 6 [EEx ia] BAS98ATEX 7210U 3001345 2000 152423-1000846X

8016-CC-35 IS powerextension cable 0.35m See note 6 [EEx ia] BAS98ATEX 7210U 3001345 2000 152423-1000846X



8032-CC-35 IS carrierextension cable set 0.35m See note 6 [EEx ia] BAS98ATEX 7210U 3001345 2000 152423-1000846X



8030-CE-RH IS carrierextender, right-hand See note 6 [EEx ia] BAS98ATEX 7210U 3001345 2000 152423-1000846X

8031-CE-LH IS carrierextender, left-hand See note 6 [EEx ia] BAS98ATEX 7210U 3001345 2000 152423-1000846X


Page 106 of 287

208002302

Stamp

PAC8000 Workbench Getting Started Guide

GE Intelligent Platforms, Inc.

2500 Austin Drive Charlottesville, VA 22911

www.ge-ip.com

Page 107 of 287

http://www.ge-ip.com/

The information in this manual is subject to change without notice and does not represent a commitment on the part of GE Intelligent Platforms, Inc. The software described in this manual is furnished under a license or nondisclosure agreement. This software may be used or copied only in accordance with the terms of this agreement. No part of this manual may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, including photocopying and recording, for any purpose other than the purchaser's personal use without the written permission of GE Intelligent Platforms, Inc.

© Copyright 2010 by GE Intelligent Platforms, Inc. All rights reserved. All brand names and product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies. SA06-120-111110 The text and screen shots in this document are compatible with Workbench Version 8.4.0 and subsequent releases. If you are running a previous version, please contact Technical Support.

Page 108 of 287

PAC8000 Workbench Getting Started Guide 3

Contents Section 1 - Introduction 5

SCOPE.............................................................................................................................. 5 INTENDED READERS .......................................................................................................... 7 ACCESSING ADDITIONAL HELP ........................................................................................... 7

Drawing Templates ..................................................................................................... 7 Help Files..................................................................................................................... 8 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ) ............................................................................ 9 Training........................................................................................................................ 9 Website...................................................................................................................... 10 Technical Support...................................................................................................... 10

Section 2 – Workbench Software Components 11 WORKBENCH .................................................................................................................. 11 TAG EDITOR.................................................................................................................... 13 8000 IO CONFIGURATOR ................................................................................................ 14 CONTROLLER MODULES .................................................................................................. 15 STRATEGY BUILDER ........................................................................................................ 16 STRATEGY VIEWER ......................................................................................................... 17 DISCRETE CONTROL........................................................................................................ 18 SIMULATOR..................................................................................................................... 19 REPORTS........................................................................................................................ 20 CONTROLLER STATISTICS ................................................................................................ 21 NETWORK CONFIGURATION UTILITY ................................................................................. 22 SECURITY FEATURES ...................................................................................................... 23

Section 3 – Installation 24 PRE-INSTALLATION INFORMATION..................................................................................... 24 INSTALLING THE PAC8000 CONTROL CENTER WORKBENCH............................................. 26 POST-INSTALLATION ACTIVITIES....................................................................................... 42 REPAIRING THE INSTALLATION.......................................................................................... 42

Section 4 – Additional Product CD Features 43 ADDITIONAL PROGRAMS .................................................................................................. 43 INFORMATION.................................................................................................................. 46

Section 5 – Licensing 51 Section 6 – Project Tutorial 52

LAUNCHING THE WORKBENCH.......................................................................................... 54 CREATING A PROJECT ..................................................................................................... 55 INITIAL CONTROLLER SET UP........................................................................................... 57 CONFIGURING IO MODULES............................................................................................. 69 CREATING AND ASSIGNING PROJECT TAGS....................................................................... 77

GE Intelligent Platforms, Inc. September 2010

Page 109 of 287

4 PAC8000 Workbench Getting Started Guide

WORKING WITH PROCESS CONTROL STRATEGIES............................................................. 85 Creating a Process Control Strategy......................................................................... 85 Downloading to the Process Simulator ..................................................................... 89 Downloading to the Controller ................................................................................... 91 Process Control Strategy Checkout .......................................................................... 93

WORKING WITH DISCRETE CONTROL STRATEGIES ............................................................ 94 Creating a Discrete Control Strategy......................................................................... 94 Downloading to the Logic Simulator........................................................................ 106 Downloading to the Controller ................................................................................. 108 Discrete Control Strategy Checkout ........................................................................ 110

RETRIEVING DATA FROM OTHER 8000 CONTROLLERS .................................................... 112 MAPPING POINTS FROM REMOTE MODBUS DEVICES ....................................................... 119 LINKING TO INTOUCH..................................................................................................... 122

Connecting to DesignerSim..................................................................................... 122 Connecting to the Universal IO Server.................................................................... 126

IMPORTING TAGS INTO HMIS ......................................................................................... 130 Importing Tags into Cimplicity ................................................................................. 130 Importing Tags into iFIX .......................................................................................... 130 Importing Tags into Wonderware ............................................................................ 130

ADDITIONAL INFORMATION ............................................................................................. 132 Glossary 133


Page 110 of 287


Section 1 - Introduction The PAC8000 Control System provides a fully integrated, open solution for process control, discrete automation, strategy development, and process visualization. The process engineer is supplied with the tools to design, implement, document, and maintain a process control system using advanced control strategies or the IEC 61131-3 programming languages.

The PAC8000 Control System consists of a number of open system components, including:

Workbench - an integrated project development environment that centralizes and coordinates project engineering, including instrument index, control strategies (process and discrete), process visualization, (operating faceplates), history (alarming and trending), and project management.

HMI - components for the PAC8000 Operator Interface (HMI), plant historian, and batch recipe management.

Control Platform - a rugged, field-mountable system consisting of the controller and the 8000 Process IO system.

The Workbench is an integrated engineering environment, which automatically configures the operator interface and historian. Due to the open nature of the system, other components that make use of industry standards such as Modbus, OPC, Ethernet, and HART can be easily integrated.

Note: PAC8000 Open Control components can be used with any HMI software that communicates via Modbus or OPC.

Scope The intent of this Getting Started Guide is to provide assistance in building your first application using the PAC8000 Workbench; it is not intended to replace any of the available training courses. However, working through these procedures leads to a greater understanding of the Workbench, thereby enhancing the lessons in the training class. It is also assumed that readers have a basic understanding of Microsoft Windows and the features of their operating system. The Workbench system components are described,


Page 111 of 287


the product installation procedure is explained, the licensing and registration process is discussed, and a full project tutorial is provided. The installation process assumes that you are installing the product for the first time. If you are upgrading an existing installation, please refer to the Upgrade Instructions that were shipped with your product CD.

This is not a hardware manual and no attempt is made to explain the details of the hardware components of the system. For additional installation information, please refer to:

• 8000 Controllers Hybrid, Process, Logic, & EBIM Instruction Manual Document number: INM8521

• 8000 – 2/x I/O modules Instruction Manual (General Purpose and 2/2 Applications) Document number: INM8100

• 8000 – 2/x I/O modules Instruction Manual (2/1 Applications) Document number: INM8200

• 8000 – 2/x Power Supplies – Configurations and Installation Document number: INM8900

An HMI is an integral part of any control system. While some aspects of Wonderware’s InTouch are described in this guide, any HMI that can communicate via OPC, Modbus RTU, or Modbus TCP can be used with the control system. For detailed HMI information, please refer to the documentation provided by your HMI vendor.


Page 112 of 287


Intended Readers This Getting Started Guide is intended for those users who are:

• Installing the PAC8000 Workbench for the first time.

• Upgrading an existing application of the PAC8000 Workbench.

• Learning how to use the PAC8000 Workbench.

• Currently using the PAC8000 Workbench, but wish to expand their knowledge in key areas, such as the IEC 61131-3 programming language.

Accessing Additional Help In addition to the Project Tutorial provided in this guide, there are various documents and help files to assist in the successful operation of the PAC8000 Workbench. Some examples are identified in this section.

Drawing Templates Programming elements, such as basic PID loops, cascaded PID loops, adaptive tuning PID loops, motor control functions, and time pulse controllers are frequently used to implement control strategies. A set of template drawings is delivered and installed with the system so that each customer will not have to build these common elements.

When creating a drawing, you will notice a From Template option. Select this option to display the system’s available templates. Once the appropriate template is chosen, the new drawing is created using the blocks in this template. (You then have to renumber the blocks so that they are appropriate for your project. The tag names used in the template also need to be replaced with tag names that are appropriate for your project.)

A detailed description of each template, as well as the blocks used, can be found in the PAC8000 Workbench Help. To access Help, open the PAC8000 Workbench and select the Help | Contents menu item. Pre-defined templates are listed in the Templates | Available Templates section. Select the template for which you would like additional information. You are presented with a description of the template detailing the blocks used, as well as the template drawing.


Page 113 of 287


Help Files Application Help

A full set of Help files is delivered and installed with the system. From any application, (PAC8000 Workbench, Network Configurator, etc.) you may select Help from the pull down Help menu item, click the Help option, if one is present on the form, or press the F1 key on the keyboard to view the Help. Each Help file has a detailed index, table of contents, and search function to expedite locating additional information for a particular topic.

Function Block Manual

Detailed Help is also available for each function block in the Strategy Builder. Double-click on a function block in Edit mode to access the Block Attributes dialog. Click Help to display the Help for the block, including a description of the block, block attributes, input parameters, and output parameters.

If this is your first time using the PAC8000 product, it is very likely that you are not familiar with the blocks included in the Workbench. Though blocks may have similar names among different products, each product implements blocks in a unique way. To clarify the implementation of the PAC8000 product function blocks, a user’s manual is installed in the product’s Documentation directory: <installation_directory>\Documentation\Function Blocks Document.pdf

This document lists each available function block and a brief description of the block’s function. From this high-level description, you can determine the correct block to use and then access the function block online Help to understand the block’s attributes, as well as its input and output parameters.

Workbench Wizards Manual

This manual lists the Wizards included with the PAC8000 Workbench that allow you to quickly produce graphics in Wonderware’s InTouch. This manual is located at the following path: <installation_directory\Documentation\Workbench Wizards.pdf


Page 114 of 287


Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ) In addition to the online Help, the Workbench also contains a Frequently Asked Questions section. From the PAC8000 Workbench, select the Help | Frequently Asked Questions menu item; a list of commonly asked questions and their answers is displayed.

In addition to the documentation provided within the product, various services are also available to assist in accessing help. These services are described below.

Training In the Americas:

PAC8000 offers three distinct training programs with formalized, instructor-led, hands-on training to familiarize customers with the systems they have purchased.

• Core Components Training - This four-day class is designed to give students the necessary skills to engineer, configure, and maintain a PAC8000 system. Students create several projects during the class, allowing them to work through the complete project development cycle multiple times during the class (project configuration, tag creation, IO module configuration, control strategy development, downloading, and debugging).

• Maintenance Training - This one-day class is designed to give students the necessary skills to maintain and troubleshoot all areas of a PAC8000 system, including hardware and control strategies.

• SafetyNet Workbench Training - This three-day class is designed to teach students the skills necessary to configure, program, analyze, and troubleshoot a safety system strategy. This class is not a class in functional safety, but how to use our system, which is certified for use in an SIL2 application.

• On-site Training - In addition to the above training courses, on-site training is also available, as needed. This allows the course to be customized for your application needs.


Page 115 of 287


Website The Website (www.ge-ip.com/support) contains links to data sheets and other information that can help you find solutions to potential issues when building and commissioning your control system.

Technical Support Europe, the Middle East, and Africa (EMEA)

Online Technical Support: www.ge-ip.com/support

Phone: +800-1-433-2682

Technical Support Email: [email protected]

Customer Care Email: [email protected]

Primary languages of support: English, French, German, Italian, Czech

Support in the Americas (Americas)

Online Technical Support: www.ge-ip.com/support

Phone: 800-433-2682

Technical support email: [email protected]

Customer care email: [email protected]

Primary Languages of support: English


Page 116 of 287

http://www.gefanuc.com/support

mailto:[email protected]


http://www.gefanuc.com/support




Section 2 – Workbench Software Components

This section provides a high-level view of the PAC8000 Workbench software components. Further details for each software component can be found in the Project Tutorial section of this guide or the Workbench online Help.

This section of the guide is intended for those users who are:

• Installing the product for the first time

• Interested in a broad overview of the product

The PAC8000 Workbench software includes the following system components:

Workbench The PAC8000 Workbench provides the foundation for defining a project and all of its components: tags, hardware configuration, tables, and control logic. The Workbench, with components indicated, appears as follows:


Page 117 of 287


The Workbench consists of two main sections – the Project Explorer and the Data Entry Panel.

The Project Explorer, located in the left-hand pane of the Workbench, provides assistance with adding controllers, drawings, tags, modules, etc. You will browse the Project Explorer tree to configure projects and controllers, as necessary.

Projects are defined using the menu items displayed when the Project Explorer is active. Once created and defined, projects are displayed in the Project Explorer with three nodes: Project Tag Index, Project Reports, and Launch Network Configurator.

After creating a project, project tags are defined through the Project Tag Index. A project tag is a name that refers to a channel on a physical IO card. As each tag is created, it is saved in a database allowing for subsequent data retrieval through the report manager.

Controllers are the next project component to be added and configured. Controllers are abstractions of the physical hardware. Once a controller is created, the following nodes appear beneath the controller node in the Project Explorer: Controller Modules, Controller Reports, Controller Statistics, Launch 8000 IO Configurator, and Create/Edit Discrete Control Interface. Control Strategy Drawings are also displayed in the controller node once they have been created.

Each controller contains zero or more IO modules to which physical devices, such as transmitters and valves, are connected. The physical hardware is configured using the 8000 IO Configurator. Project tags that were created earlier are then linked to channels of the IO modules.

Control logic can now be written. Process control logic is written using the Strategy Builder and IEC 61131-3 logic is written using the Discrete Control Interface. The Discrete Control Interface enables you to download compiled logic to a simulator. Downloading to the simulator allows logic to be checked out before it is downloaded to the controller. (The PAC8000 Workbench allows for downloads to the controller.) Regardless of the download type, both the Strategy Builder and the IEC 61131-3 logic editor support real time viewing so that logic can be viewed with data to assist in troubleshooting.

Network information and controller diagnostic information can be viewed in either the Network Configurator or Controller Statistics.

The Data Entry Panel occupies the right-hand pane of the Workbench. As specific tasks are selected in the Project Explorer, the Data Entry Panel changes to facilitate data entry. Each panel is specifically designed to provide intuitive and consistent data entry fields.


Page 118 of 287


Tag Editor Project tags are names and attributes assigned to channels on IO modules. These tags are created through the Tag Editor. In addition to collecting the basic data for the tag (via the IO Definition tab), information required to populate the HMI database, such as alarm limits, can also be specified (via the HMI tab). If a complete instrument index is needed, specific information for the instrument, such as transmitter manufacturer, can also be entered (via the Manufacturer tab).

The Tag Editor has two views: single tag and multi-tag display. When multi-tag display is selected, all tags are displayed in a spreadsheet format. This mode is useful when making changes that affect multiple tags.

The Tag Editor also supports searching for tags based on one or more criteria. Tags matching the search criteria are displayed in Project Explorer under the Project Tag Index node.

For more information regarding tag definition, please refer to the Creating Project Tags section in the online Help. If you wish to gain experience in defining tags, see the Creating and Assigning Project Tags section in the Project Tutorial of this guide or refer to the labs in the Modules section of the PAC8000 Workbench Core Components Training Guide.


Page 119 of 287


8000 IO Configurator The 8000 IO Configurator is launched to configure the system hardware (controllers and IO modules) when a controller is added to the project or the Launch 80000 IO Configurator node is double-clicked (for existing controllers). When the controller node ( ) is selected, the network attributes of the controller can be specified and IO modules can be added or deleted. Once a module is added, the specific attributes for each module can then be configured. Once the required data for the controller and each IO module is entered, the configuration data is downloaded to the controller using this utility.

For more information regarding the 8000 IO Configurator, please refer to the IO Configurator Training Guide located in the documentation directory (<installation_directory>\Documentation\IO Configurator Training Guide.pdf) or the IO Configurator online Help (<installation_directory>Documentation\IOConfig.chm).


Page 120 of 287


Controller Modules Project tags are associated with IO module channels in the Controller Modules form. When a Spare channel is selected, a drop down list appears and all tags of the appropriate IO type that have not been assigned to another IO module channel are displayed. Select the tag and click Apply to assign the tag to the channel.

You may also choose to create new tags from this screen by selecting the New Tag option from the Tagname drop down list. This allows new tags to be created without exiting the Assign Points form.

For more information regarding Controller Modules, please refer to the Assigning Modules to Controllers section in the online Help or the Creating and Assigning Project Tags, or Configuring IO Modules sections in the Project Tutorial of this Getting Started Guide.


Page 121 of 287


Strategy Builder Process control logic diagrams are developed using the Strategy Builder. Select the appropriate function blocks, assign symbolic tags, and then connect the blocks with analog or digital lines to create the control strategy. Function blocks and connectors are selected from the right hand pane and placed on the drawing using the drag and drop method.

For more information regarding the available function blocks in the PAC8000 product, please refer to the Function Block manual. For more information regarding the function block editor, please refer to the Creating a Drawing Strategy section in the online Help, the Working with Process Control Strategies section in the Project Tutorial of this guide, or the labs in the Strategy Builder section of the Process Control Training Guide.


Page 122 of 287


Strategy Viewer The Strategy Viewer facilitates the animation of logic diagrams with either simulated or live real time process data. The Strategy Viewer is also used for tuning and operator control purposes. Module and IO diagnostic tags are provided for troubleshooting assistance via the operator interface, allowing logic to be debugged quickly and effectively.

For more information regarding the Strategy Viewer, please refer to the Viewing Live Data section in the online Help, the Process Control Strategy Checkout section in the Project Tutorial, or the labs in the Viewing Live Data section of the Process Control Training Guide.


Page 123 of 287


Discrete Control The Discrete Control Interface is used for IEC 61131-3 Programming. Once launched, programs, functions, and function blocks are built in any of the IEC languages: Ladder Diagram, Structured Text, Instruction List, Function Block Diagram, Sequential Function Chart, and/or Flow Chart. Any mix of languages can be used, allowing you to choose the language that is appropriate for your application.

For more information regarding Discrete Control, please refer to the online Help that is accessible in the Discrete Control Interface (select the Help | Contents menu item within the Discrete Control Interface), the Working with Discrete Control Strategies section in the Project Tutorial, or the Using InTouch Technical Note.


Page 124 of 287


Simulator The Simulator (DesignerSim) enables the control system designer to test process control strategies in a single controller without the need of physical hardware or any additional code. It can also be used to train operators and maintenance personnel. Instead of loading the control strategy configuration file into the controller, the file is loaded into the Simulator for debugging and testing. The Simulator operates as a controller, communicating with the operator interface and batch scheduling engine, as well as the Workbench.

For more information regarding the Simulator, please refer to the Simulator section in the online Help, the Downloading to the Process Simulator section in the Project Tutorial, or the Downloading a Strategy to a Simulator section in the Process Control Training Guide.


Page 125 of 287


Reports All project data is saved in a SQL Server database. Since this is a standard Microsoft database used by many other products, it is simple to create queries and reports for data presentation. The Reports feature contains a number of predefined reports at the project and controller level that aid in producing project documentation. If preferred, you may also create your own custom reports.

Once the form is launched, select the appropriate report from the drop down list and click Run Report. The relevant data is retrieved and presented. Once the report has been run, it can be saved, printed, or emailed.

The Workbench provides support for Standard and Custom reports. Standard reports are shipped with the product and pertain to either a project or a controller. Custom reports are user-created, enabling you to customize the output to fit your documentation needs. Standard reports include tags assigned to controller modules, all tags and their corresponding addresses, and tags and where they are used. Standard reports can be tailored to meet your needs and you can also write your own reports.

For more information regarding Reports, please refer to the Reports section in the online Help or the Reports section in the Workbench Core Components Training Guide.


Page 126 of 287


Controller Statistics The Controller Statistics feature displays scan time breakdown, system parameters, and event logs. To access the Controller Statistics screen, expand the controller node In the Project Explorer and double-click to display the screen below.

The top portion of the Statistics tab shows the breakdown of the controller scan time so that the most time consuming portion of the execution cycle can be determined. Other diagnostic data is also displayed, including the number of controller failovers, refreshes, and warm starts. The bottom portion of the screen shows the controller event log. The event log shows the last 512 events that have occurred in the controller. Such events can be triggered by channel failures, module failures, downloads, etc.

The System Parameters, Control Package Params, Comm Stats, and Module/Channel Health tabs contain parameters that relate to execution and timeouts. These parameters do not normally need to be changed. If you feel it is necessary to make changes to any of these settings, please contact Technical Support before doing so, as unexpected results may occur.

For more information regarding Controller Statistics, please refer to the Controller Statistics section in the online Help.


Page 127 of 287


Network Configuration Utility The Network Configuration Utility is a network management tool that is used to assign IP addresses to unconfigured controllers and show network information for all controllers on a process network. When the utility is launched, the network is queried for all controllers and those found are presented, as shown below. Double-click a controller name to access detailed network information and send commands to the controller.

For more information regarding the Network Configurator, please refer to the Network Configuration section in the online Help, the section on Initial Controller Setup in the Project Tutorial, or Network Configuration lab in the Workbench Core Components Training Guide.


Page 128 of 287


Security Features Since the PAC8000 system is used to monitor and control potentially dangerous processes, it is important to prevent unauthorized changes to the data and programs running in the controller. The PAC8000 Workbench provides the following security features: Security Privileges - Each Workbench user has a user id and password with which to

logon. This logon indicates the types of changes that are permitted, as well as which data can be accessed and modified.

Trusted Hosts Table - The Trusted Hosts Table prevents unauthorized devices (computers, COM ports, etc.) from making changes to data in the controller. Each device that is permitted to make data changes must have its MAC address listed in the controller’s Trusted Hosts Table. This feature is only available for a controller with Version 2 Firmware.

Keyswitch - The keyswitch is a digital input that can be used to “lock” the controller. When the controller is “locked” no writes, configuration changes, strategy changes, etc., can be made to the controller. When “unlocked,” data can be changed as long as the correct privileges have been assigned in the Trusted Hosts Table. This feature is only available for a controller with Version 2 Firmware.

Controller Password - For additional security, the controller can be given a password, which must be entered before the Trusted Hosts Table can be downloaded or the Mode can be changed. This feature is only available for a controller with Version 2 Firmware.

Configuration Mode and Protected Mode - In Configuration Mode, changes can be made to the data in the controller as long you are authorized to make the change (based on the security level of the login and the access granted to the computer by the Trusted Hosts Table) and the keyswitch is unlocked. In Protected mode, changes are only permitted to the mode, i.e. changes from Protected mode back to configuration mode, and to the Trusted Hosts Table, as allowed by the keyswitch setting. This feature is only available for a controller with Version 2 Firmware.

Change Log - Change tracking can be enabled for a controller. You can then run a report to view the changes that have been made. Each change gives a description of the change made, the logon id of the user making the change, and the date and time the change was made.

Difference Tools - When a strategy is downloaded to the controller, a backup of the project is automatically made if this option is selected. The Workbench provides a File Differences Utility that allows you to see the changes made between versions.


Page 129 of 287


Section 3 – Installation

This section describes the process of installing the PAC8000 Workbench. If the PAC8000 Workbench is already installed on your computer and you need to upgrade your installation, please refer to the Update Instructions that were shipped with your CD. Pre-Installation Information Before installing the PAC8000 Workbench, please ensure the following:

• The drive where the PAC8000 Workbench will be installed has been identified.

• You have administrative privileges on the machine. If you do not, the installation procedure will fail.

• The proper operating system is installed. The PAC8000 Workbench can only be installed on Windows 2000 SP4 (or later) or Windows XP SP1 (or later). Earlier versions of these operating systems or operating systems not mentioned will cause the installation to end with an error.

• Your PC hardware meets the hardware requirements of the software. You computer must be a Pentium III 700 or greater with at least 125 MB of RAM and 680 MB of free hard drive space. If you intend to install the PAC8000 Workbench on a drive other than the operating system root, you must still have at least 540 MB of disk space available on the drive where the operating system is installed. In addition, you must have at least 135 MB of disk space available on the drive on which the PAC8000 Workbench is installed.

• Virus protection software has been disabled. If it has not, errors may occur during the installation or the installation may take longer than expected. As soon as the installation completes, you may re-enable the virus protection software.

• All processes associated with the PAC8000 Workbench or the Universal IO server have been stopped. If they have not, you are prompted to stop them during the installation process.

Note: If Wonderware’s InTouch is your HMI, it must be installed before you install the PAC8000 Workbench. This is necessary because the Universal IO Server, which is installed along with the PAC8000 Workbench, requires InTouch’s common components in order to properly install SuiteLink.


Page 130 of 287


During the installation of the PAC8000 Workbench, other components are installed. These components include:

• Universal IO Server Limited Edition - In order to communicate with the controller, the Workbench requires a Modbus TCP driver. The Universal IO Server is installed for this purpose.

• .NET Framework - Some of the PAC8000 Workbench components are built using .NET technology. In order to take advantage of these components, the .NET Framework is required.

• MSDE - The Microsoft Desktop Engine allows the PAC8000 Workbench to access MS-SQL type databases. If you already have a later version of MSDE or another compatible MS-SQL database driver installed, this component will not be installed.

• Sequence of Events - Sequence of Events (SOE) data gives an accurate time for event occurrence, along with the event value and other useful information. This data can then be used to help determine a specific order of occurrences or "Sequence of Events." There are two different kinds of events that can be recorded: data change events from SOE modules based on channel inputs or data change events from analog or digital registers found in the controller. Data change events can be recorded no faster than the cycle time of the controller while SOE module events are recorded in accord with times in the module’s data sheet (order of milliseconds).


Page 131 of 287


Installing the PAC8000 Control Center Workbench 1. Insert the product CD into the appropriate drive.

2. The PAC8000 Product Installation window appears. Click Next Page.


Page 132 of 287


3. The Options screen appears. Select the PAC8000 Control Center option and click Go.

Note: The text and screen shots in this document are compatible with PAC8000 Workbench Version 8.4.0 and subsequent releases. Version x.x.x on the screen shots refers to the current version number of the product that is being installed.


Page 133 of 287


4. If Microsoft .NET Framework Version 1.1 SP1 is not installed on your computer, the following dialog appears while this version is installed. Proceed to the next step to continue.

If you already have the current version of Microsoft .NET Framework, skip to step 6 in this section.

5. You are prompted to restart your computer. Click Restart on the following screen and

the installation will automatically resume upon startup.


Page 134 of 287


6. The Windows Installer screen appears.

Note: If a standalone version of Sequence of Events (SOE) is installed on this computer, the following error occurs. Remove the existing version of SOE via the Control Panel. Once SOE has been removed, begin the Workbench installation again and an upgraded version of SOE will automatically be installed.


Page 135 of 287


7. The Welcome to the InstallShield Wizard for PAC8000 Control Center screen appears. This screen may be visible for several minutes while the InstallShield Wizard is being prepared. If a previous installation of the Workbench exists on this computer, you may notice a reference to the current application.


Page 136 of 287


8. If a Workbench-related service or program is currently running, the Test State of Listed Services/Programs screen appears. A checkmark indicates which services/programs are running. Click Terminate Running Services/Programs to stop the services/programs. It may be necessary to click this button more than once to stop all occurrences. Be sure to scroll through the entire list to view all programs. When all services/programs have stopped, the option to Continue is enabled. Click Continue to proceed with the installation. You may also click Cancel to prematurely exit the installation and manually stop the services/programs from running if they cannot be stopped from this screen. If Cancel is selected, an error message is displayed to report that the installation cannot continue. Manually stop the running services/programs and restart the installation process.


Page 137 of 287


9. The Welcome screen appears. Click Next to continue.

10. The License Agreement screen appears. Review the License Agreement and select

the I accept the terms in the license agreement option. Click Next to continue.


Page 138 of 287


11. If the PAC8000 Workbench has already been installed on this computer, the PAC8000 Control Center Database screen appears. (Otherwise, proceed to the next step.) This screen prompts for the PAC8000 Workbench User Name and Password, as they may have been changed from the default sa and ocpcc2003. The fields on this screen retain the default values so you only need to click Next to proceed.

Note: If incorrect values are entered, a message is displayed informing you to attach the databases using the Database Maintenance Utility. You may do so once the installation is complete. (You must have administrative privileges.)


Page 139 of 287


12. The Setup Type screen appears. Select the appropriate installation type.

Complete - To install the Workbench to the C drive, select the Complete option and click Next to continue. Proceed to the next step.

Custom - To install the Workbench to a location other than the C drive, select the Custom option and click Next. Proceed to step a, below.


Page 140 of 287


a. The Custom Setup screen appears; click Change.

b. Select the desired location for installation from the Change Current

Destination Folder screen and click OK.


Page 141 of 287


c. The Custom Setup screen appears again. Click Next to continue with the installation.

Note: This procedure only installs the PAC8000 software on the selected drive. Other files are installed to Program Files on the drive where the operating system is installed. As indicated earlier, 680 MB of disk space is required for the complete installation. However, when an alternate drive is selected, 135 MB is required on the selected drive and 540 MB is required on the drive where the operating system is installed.


Page 142 of 287


13. The Ready to Install the Program screen appears. Click Install.

14. The Installing status screen appears.


Page 143 of 287


15. The M4 Common Licensing screen appears.

16. The Microsoft SQL Server (OCPCC Instance) installs if it is not currently installed

on your machine. Otherwise, skip to the next step.

17. The Universal IO Server (Limited Edition) installer screen appears.


Page 144 of 287


18. The Preparing to Install Universal IO Server (Limited Edition) screen appears briefly. If it is necessary to upgrade your current version or if you do not already have the Universal Server installed, a limited edition of this program is automatically installed. If you already have the current version, skip to step 21 in this section.

19. The Welcome to the InstallShield Wizard for the Universal IO Server (Limited

Edition) screen appears briefly.


Page 145 of 287


20. The Installing Universal IO Server (Limited Edition) screen appears. A progress bar indicates the status of the installation.

21. Once the Universal IO Server installation is complete, the Installing PAC8000

Control Center status screen reappears. A progress bar indicates the status of the installation. Please be patient, as this installation may take several minutes.


Page 146 of 287


22. When the installation is complete, the PAC8000 Control Center InstallShield Wizard Completed screen appears. Click Finish.

23. You may be prompted to restart your computer to enact configuration changes. If so,

you must do so before attempting to run the Workbench.

Note: If you are not prompted to restart your computer, it is considered good Windows operating system practice to do so at this point.

24. The Installation process is now complete.


Page 147 of 287


Post-Installation Activities Once the installation process has finished, you may add accounts to the Universal IO Server. The Universal IO Server is configured so that only the user who installed the software can add and communicate with devices. If other users require this ability, appropriate user accounts should be added in the Universal IO Server. For information on adding these accounts, please refer to the Security Accounts section in the Universal Server Getting Started Guide.

Repairing the Installation The PAC8000 Workbench is shipped with a set of Dynamic Link Libraries (dll) and Executable files (exe). There may be times when installing another program changes the version of a dll or exe file. When this happens, the PAC8000 Workbench may no longer function correctly. To fix any problems caused by installing other programs, go to Add or Remove Programs within Control Panel, select PAC8000 Control Center, and click Change.

Complete the ensuing process to repair your installation of the PAC8000 Workbench.


Page 148 of 287


Section 4 – Additional Product CD Features

The Product Installation CD installs and accesses items that can be used to supplement the Workbench. Such items include Communication and Maintenance Tools as well as Product and Contact Information. Additional Programs The Additional Programs feature on the Product Installation CD allows you to install optional programs. These programs can be used to access Sequence of Events (SOE) data in the controller, install the limited edition Universal IO Server, or run a support program, if instructed to do so by Technical Support.

Select the Additional Programs option from the Options screen and click Go to install additional Tools and Maintenance Programs.


Page 149 of 287


Tools Additional tools may be installed to assist in communicating with other devices, such as retrieving the order in which certain IO events occurred and communicating with other devices via Modbus and/or OPC.

• Sequence of Events – Install this application if you are using a Discrete Input Module with SOE capability or you are using the Event Recording Feature in the controller. Please refer to the Sequence of Events Getting Started Guide for installation information.

• IAS Object Manager – Install this application if you are using Industrial Application Server from Invensys Wonderware and you would like the Workbench to automatically generate objects. Please refer to the IAS Object Manager Getting Started Guide for installation information.

• 8000 IO Configurator (Standalone Version) – The 8000 IO Configurator is installed as part of the PAC8000 Workbench. Install this standalone version if you would like to configure IO on a machine, but do not require the additional functionality of the Workbench. Please refer to the IO Configurator Getting Started Guide for installation information.

• AXE Comm Stats (Standalone Version) – AXE Comm Stats is installed as part of the PAC8000 Workbench. Install this standalone version if you need to perform network troubleshooting on a machine where other Workbench functionality is not required. Please refer to the AXE Comm Stats Online Help for additional information.

• Universal IO Server (Limited Edition) – A limited edition of the server is installed with the PAC8000 Workbench; this version is only authorized to communicate with PAC8000 Controllers. Install the full version if you are authorized to communicate with other device types. Please refer to the Universal Server Getting Started Guide for installation information.

• Engineering Library – Install this application if you want to install a set of DXF files that can be used to create panel drawings or other drawings to show the layout and dimensions of the PAC8000 Hardware.

• Communication DTM – Installs Communication DTM for 8000 controllers.


Page 150 of 287


Maintenance Programs Support Programs may be installed to repair components that were damaged by the installation of another application. Select this option and click Go for a list of available programs.

Warning: Do not attempt to run any of the Maintenance Support Programs without instruction from technical support.


Page 151 of 287


Information Select Information from the Options screen and click Go.


Page 152 of 287


The Information screen displays the available options for obtaining additional information concerning the PAC8000 product and GE.


Page 153 of 287


a. Select the Contact Us option and click Go to display contact information for GE.

Note: It is not necessary to use this screen when contact information is needed, as company information is also available on the website (www.ge-ip.com) and the Help | About menu item within the PAC8000 Workbench.


Page 154 of 287

http://www.ge-ip.com/


b. The Documentation option invokes the Documentation screen. Select a product and click Go to view the corresponding manual.


Page 155 of 287


c. The CD Browser option allows you to view the contents of the Installation CD in an Explorer Window.


Page 156 of 287


Section 5 – Licensing

The license procedure is detailed in the Proficy Common Licensing Help. This file is located in Start | Programs | Proficy Common | License Documentation.

To run the license viewer, select Start | Programs | Proficy Common | License Viewer.


Page 157 of 287


Section 6 – Project Tutorial

The PAC8000 Workbench is the single engineering environment used to configure Ethernet BIMs, as well as configure and program Hybrid, Process, and Logic controllers. The Project Tutorial walks through the steps that are necessary to program a simple control strategy for a Hybrid controller. If you have another type of controller, not all steps apply to your project. Each section denotes the controller type to which the instructions apply.

This project tutorial provides instruction for creating tags, configuring IO modules, assigning tags to the modules, creating a simple Process control strategy, creating a simple discrete control strategy, downloading the strategies to both the simulator and the controller, and viewing the data online. At the end of the tutorial, you will have experience with each of the tools in the PAC8000 Workbench and have a rudimentary knowledge of how they are used.

This tutorial assumes that you have a new controller or set of controllers and IO modules. Feel free to substitute the modules that you have for those used in the tutorial. If you do not have hardware, skip the steps that require hardware interaction.

New controllers are shipped from the factory in BOOTP mode, meaning they are assigned MAC addresses, but not IP addresses. When the controller is in this configuration, the Healthy, Fault, and Failsafe LEDs flash in unison. If you are using existing controllers and intend to follow all of the steps in this tutorial, put the controllers into BOOTP mode. To do this, hold down the change state button next to the controller, power cycle the controller and continue to hold down the button until the Healthy, Fault, and Failsafe LEDs flash in unison.

Setting up controller hardware requires three distinct IP addresses that are located on the same subnet. Before setting up the controller with these IP addresses, ensure that your PC has a compatible address, i.e. it is on the same subnet as the controllers.

There are a number of steps to follow when developing a project that results in a defined and tested application. The following diagram provides a pictorial overview of the steps that are discussed in this project tutorial.


Page 158 of 287



Page 159 of 287


Launching the Workbench 1. Once the software has been installed, start the PAC8000 Workbench by selecting

the Workbench application from the Start menu.

2. The Connect to Database form is displayed requesting that you log on.

3. Enter Nodename\ocpcc into the Server Name field. (The Nodename is the name

of the computer.) The default Username is sa and the password is ocpcc2003. Logging on as such grants you full access to all features in the PAC8000 Workbench. It is possible to create your own users with specific passwords and access levels. For more information, please refer to the Workbench | Workbench Components Overview | Project Explorer Menu topic in the online Help. Then select the links Administrative Tools | Administer Users.

Note: The Workbench defaults to the last username that was used to log on. If this is the first time connecting to the database, the default username is sa.


Page 160 of 287


Creating a Project Applies to: All Controllers

1. Click in the Workbench Project Explorer and the Create new project form appears if there are no other projects configured. If this is not your first project, select the File | New Project menu item. The Create new project form appears.


Page 161 of 287


2. Enter a name for the project in the Project Name field; for our example, use the project name MyFirstProject. The project name can be up to twenty characters in length and must not contain spaces. Ensure that the desired location is selected, and click Apply. The project is added to the Project Explorer and the Workbench appears as follows:


Page 162 of 287


Initial Controller Set Up Applies to: All Controllers

1. In the Workbench Project Explorer, right-click the project name and click New Controller from the resulting menu. The Create new controller form appears.

2. Enter a name for the controller in the Controller Name field; use the name Ctrl1

for our example. The controller name can be up to sixteen characters in length and must not contain spaces.

3. Select Model 8521 from the Controller Type drop down list. Model 8521 is the basic controller type. Model 8851 (SafetyNet) is certified for use in SIL2 applications. In this case, Controller Type indicates the register allocation scheme, not the type of controller being used. The Model 8521 controller types apply to Hybrid, Process, and Logic controllers, as well as Ethernet BIMs. Select Hybrid for our example.

4. Select the External Power option and enter the number 5 in the resulting box to indicate that 5 amps of external power are available to power IO modules. As modules are added, power requirements are subtracted from this amount and the amount remaining is displayed on the Controller Modules form.


Page 163 of 287


5. Select the Version 2 Firmware option if you will be downloading your project to a controller that has Version 2.00 or higher of the Firmware. Doing so allows you to take advantage of the features that were not available in previous versions of the controller. Version 2 features include: Retained Variables, Trusted Hosts Table, Keyswitch, Controller Password, and the Register Protection Table. These features are discussed in greater detail in the Core Components Training Guide.

6. The Create new controller form should now appear as follows:

7. Click Apply and the 8000 IO Configurator utility is launched.

8. The Create Controller dialog appears. Enter the Node Number and click OK. (The default Node Number is 126.) For our example, use a node number of 50.


Page 164 of 287


9. The controller appears in the 8000 IO Configurator as follows:


Page 165 of 287


10. Click the controller name in the IO Configurator and select the Attributes tab.

11. Enter the appropriate Master IP address, Direct A IP address, Direct B IP

address, and Subnet Mask for the controller. (All three IP addresses must be entered even for simplex controllers.) For our example, enter the following IP addresses and Subnet Mask:

Master IP address: 10.1.29.50

Direct A IP address: 10.1.29.51

Direct B IP address: 10.1.29.52

Subnet Mask: 255.255.0.0


Page 166 of 287


12. Set the Type field to match your controller type (Logic, Process, Hybrid, EBIM or SafetyNet Logic). This field should match the controller type chosen when the controller was created. The First Control Package field must be set correctly based on your controller type:

Logic Controller (Logic 8521-LC-MT): Set First Control Package to Logic IEC-61131-3.

Process Controller (Process 8521-PC-MT): Set First Control Package to Process Control.

Hybrid Controller ( (8521-HC-MT): Set First Control Package to either Logic IEC-61131-3 or Process Control, based on which control strategy executable you want to run first.

Ethernet BIM (8521-EB-MT): Set First Control Package to No Control Packages.

SafetyNet Logic (8851-LC-MT): Set First Control Package to Logic IEC-71121-3.

For our example, select a Type of Hybrid (8521-HC-MT) and set the First Control Package to Logic IEC-61131-3. Once the above data is entered, the screen appears as follows:


Page 167 of 287


13. Continue entering the information appropriate for this controller on each of the tab

sheets (Properties, Attributes, COM Attributes, System, Device Mask, Dynamic Data, Module Detail). For our example, we assume that no additional data is required.

14. Select the File | Save menu option.

15. Select the File | Exit menu option and return to the Workbench.


Page 168 of 287


16. Expand the Project folder and double-click the Launch Network Configurator node. The Network Configuration Utility is launched.

17. The configuration database for the new controller is automatically loaded and the

network is interrogated to determine which controllers are currently responding. This query takes approximately 10 seconds from the time of launch.


Page 169 of 287


18. Because the new controller has not been configured, it is not “seen” on the network, and does not appear in the list view box. The Network Config Tool begins to “listen” for controllers that are broadcasting their MAC addresses. When it determines that a controller is broadcasting, the icon in the lower right corner of the form shows a disconnected network. If your new controller is installed correctly on the network, the following icon appears in the bottom, right corner of the utility with a yellow background and a red X:

Note: If there are multiple new controllers, only one should be put on the network at a time so that it is clear which controller is being assigned IP addresses. In addition, if your controllers are a redundant pair, only one controller should be powered up at this time. Once the IP address configuration is complete, power up the second controller. The IP addresses of the second controller are automatically set by the first controller.


Page 170 of 287


19. Double-click this icon to start the configuration dialog. Alternatively, you may select the Tools | Assign IP Address menu item.

20. The Assign MAC Address form is displayed, showing all of the controllers that are currently defined in the 8000 IO Configurator database. If the database has a MAC address that matches the unconfigured controller, that line is selected. Otherwise, no lines are selected.

Note: The unassigned MAC address appears in the title of the form.


Page 171 of 287


21. Select an entry and click Apply or double-click an entry to display the Assign IP Address dialog:

22. Click Cancel or Apply. If you click Apply, the network is queried to ensure that the

selected IP addresses are not in use on the network. If they are in use, you are made aware of this and have the option to cancel the assignment. If the IP addresses are not in use, the IP addresses and Modbus Node Number are sent to the unconfigured controller. If the original MAC addresses were not entered, the MAC address of the unconfigured controller is written to the 8000 IO Configurator database.


Page 172 of 287


23. If the All Controllers option is selected on the Assign MAC Address form, you may receive a warning message upon assigning the IP addresses to the controller. This is due to the fact that the MAC address of the controller does not match the MAC address with which the IP address was previously associated.

24. Click Yes (No is the default) to assign the IP Addresses to the unconfigured

controller and write the unconfigured controller’s MAC address to the 8000 IO Configurator database.

25. Once the IP Addresses are assigned to the controller, the Network Configurator checks to see if any configuration exists in the controller. If it does, the configuration items are listed and you are asked if the items should be cleared.

26. Click Yes to clear the information, thereby making the controller configured as it

was when it left the factory. Click No to leave the information intact.


Page 173 of 287


27. Once the IP addresses are assigned, select Check Network | Wait 2 Seconds from the Tools menu. This causes the network to be queried for controllers and all controllers found on the network are presented. In our example, one controller is found:

Note: If controllers do not appear in the list view box, it may be necessary to select the appropriate Network Interface Card, if there is more than one in your PC. Select the Tools | Check Network | Select Network Card pull down menu and choose the desired card.


Page 174 of 287


Configuring IO Modules Applies to: All Controllers

Once the IP addresses are assigned, the remaining configuration can be entered and then downloaded to the controller through the use of the 8000 IO Configurator.

1. In the Project Explorer expand the controller node and double-click Launch 8000 IO Configurator.


Page 175 of 287


2. Right-click the controller node (the tree branch named 50Ctrl1 in our example) and select New Module from the resulting menu to add IO Modules. The following dialog appears.

3. Select the correct module type from the Type drop down list and pick the

appropriate slot for the module from the Slot number drop down list. For our example, select the 8101-HI-TX and place it in Slot number 1. Click OK.


Page 176 of 287


4. Click the to the left of the controller name to expand the list and display the module that was just added.

5. Click on the module and select the Channel Attributes tab to configure the

module’s channels. The fields are defined as follows:

• Active - If this field is checked, the module scans the channel for an input value. For our example, leave all channels active.

• Alarm Limits -These settings correspond to hardware alarms, not operator interface alarms, as the operator interface alarms are configured as part of the project tag definition. The hardware alarms are set in terms of percent,


Page 177 of 287


with 0% being 4mA and 100% being 20mA. Set the Hi Alarm field to 105% and the Lo Alarm field to -5% for all channels. This causes the channels to fail if the transmitters fluctuate a threshold below 4mA or above 20mA.

• Deadband - The hysteresis for the alarm. Leave as 0% for our example.

• Deadzone - The smallest change in input reported by the module. Leave as 0% so all changes are reported.

• Failstate Condition - The value applied by the module when the controller and module lose communication. This can be Hold Last Value, Fail High, Fail Low, or Fail to a Predefined Value. Leave this set to Hold Last Value.

• HART Comms - If a HART-capable smart transmitter is connected to the channel, set to Enabled to cause the module to retrieve the four HART variables via universal command 3. If the transmitter does not support HART, leave as Disabled or the channel will be unhealthy. Leave this field as Disabled for our example.


Page 178 of 287


6. Repeat the process above to add an 8102-HO-IP to Slot 2, an 8115-DO-DC to Slot 3, and an 8105-TI-TC to Slot 4. When the 8105-TI-TC is added, the following warning appears to notify you that the 8105-TI-TC does not require bussed field power, but the 8115-DO-DC does. Click Yes.

7. The IO Configurator appears as follows:


Page 179 of 287


8. The IO configuration must now be downloaded to the controller to become active.

Click the green traffic light in the toolbar to place the controller online.

9. Select the Configuration | Download Controller menu item to initiate the download. The Download Configuration Options dialog appears. Leave the options as default. (Save configuration to NVM after download and Continue Module Scanning selected.)

As these options are appropriately defaulted based on the changes made to the configuration, we recommend that you leave the options set at default. The options are defined as follows:

• Save configuration to NVM after download – Causes the hardware configuration to be saved to flash memory once the download is complete. Therefore, if power to the controller is cycled, the configuration is retained.

• Restart controller after download – Once the download is complete, the controller is restarted. This is only necessary if address changes are made (IP addresses or node numbers) and should not be done on a running plant.

• Continue Module Scanning – If this option is not selected, each module is restarted once the configuration is downloaded. Therefore, selecting this option allows the modules to continue scanning during the configuration download, ensuring that configuration changes can be made to a running plant.


Page 180 of 287


10. Once the options are set, as appropriate, click OK to start the download. The Download progress dialog indicates completion. Click OK once the transmission is complete.

11. Select the controller node in the IO Configurator and select the Module Detail tab.

The modules configured in the IO Configurator match the modules in the controller; the modules should all have the Module State of Running as shown here:


Page 181 of 287


Note: If the module state is something other than Running, the wrong modules were probably selected during the configuration process. Verify that the modules in the IO carrier match the modules in the configuration, make changes as appropriate, and download again.

12. Close the IO Configurator. If you have not saved the changes, you are prompted to do so at this time.


Page 182 of 287


Creating and Assigning Project Tags

Applies to: All Controllers

1. In the Workbench Project Explorer, right-click the Project Tag Index node and select New Tag.

2. A name for the tag is requested.

3. Enter TE101 for the name and click OK. To complete the tag definition, fill in the

fields on the IO Definition tab, as follows:

Description 1: Temp element 101 Engr Min or DI0 State: 0 Engr Max or DI 1 State: 250 Engr Units: DEG C Signal Type: TCK Signal Min: 0 Signal Max: 100 Assigned: NA

Click Save Data to commit the changes.


Page 183 of 287



Page 184 of 287


4. Repeat the above process to add the following tag: Tagname: MotorStarter Description 1: Starts the motor Engr Min or DI0 State: OFF Engr Max or DI 1 State: ON Engr Units: NONE Signal Type: DO Signal Min: 0 Signal Max: 24 Assigned: NA

Notes:

• Tags that are already defined in a spreadsheet can be imported. Save the spreadsheet data in CSV format and use the Data Import Utility. Open the Window Explorer; the Data Import Utility is located at the following path: <installation_drive>\Program Files\8000\Control Center\DataImportUtility.exe. For more information, please refer to the Data Import Utility Help file or the Importing Tags lab in the Core Components Training Guide.

• Workbench version 8.4 and subsequent releases support the creation of arrays. Please refer to the How To | Project Tags | How to Create and Use Arrays section of the online Help for more information.


Page 185 of 287


5. Double-click Controller Modules under the controller node in Project Explorer to associate tags with modules. Click the to the left of the controller name in the middle pane to expand the list and display the modules that were added in the 8000 IO Configurator.


Page 186 of 287


6. Select a module (be sure to click a channel) and choose the appropriate tag for the channel. For our example, choose the TI, TCH/mV, 4-Ch, 2/2 (4) and click Get Assigned IO in the Assign points pane.


Page 187 of 287


7. On the channel to which the point is to be assigned, select the appropriate signal type in the Signal drop down list for the channel. Click on the word Spare for the appropriate channel and pick the tag to be assigned. For our example, select the TCK signal for Point 2 and the TE101 tagname.


Page 188 of 287


8. Click Apply to assign the tag to the channel.


Page 189 of 287


9. Repeat these steps for each tag to be assigned. For our example, assign the tag MotorStarter to channel 1 of the DO module.

10. To compile the IO, right-click the controller in Project Explorer and select Compile

IO.


Page 190 of 287


Working with Process Control Strategies This section describes the necessary steps to create a process control strategy, compile the strategy, download to the simulator and/or the controller, and then debug the strategy using real time data. If you do not have a Hybrid or Process controller, this section does not apply to you.

Creating a Process Control Strategy Applies to: Hybrid and Process Controllers

To create a process control strategy, start by creating a new drawing; add blocks and connectors to the drawing, and then compile the drawing.

1. Right-click the controller and select Drawings | New Drawing. The Create New Drawing dialog appears.

Note: This process creates a blank drawing. The Workbench has a number of predefined templates to assist in quickly creating drawings for common operations (PID, Motor Control, etc.). Click From Template to utilize this feature. For more information about using the From Template feature, refer to the Creating a Drawing from a Template lab in the Templates section of the Process Control Training Guide.


Page 191 of 287


2. Specify a name and description for the drawing and click OK. For our example, use the name AddBlock with a description of My first drawing.

3. The Strategy Builder is launched and the drawing can be created.


Page 192 of 287


4. The Zoom icon ( ) is used to expand a section of the drawing. Blocks and connectors are added to drawings by dragging them from the toolbars and dropping them onto the grid. Each end of the connector must be placed on an appropriate connection point. When the connector is properly anchored at an end point, the arrow disappears. When both ends are properly anchored, the connector changes from red to green. For our example, drag an ADD block from the Math

blocks catalog ( ) and drop it onto the drawing. Enter ADDRESULT in the Output Symbol field and Integer in the Output Type field of the Enter ADD Attributes dialog. Click Save.

5. Drop a FIXED block from the Logic catalog ( ) next to the ADD block and enter a Value of 1 on the Enter FIXED Attributes dialog.


Page 193 of 287


6. Click Save and then use connectors to connect inputs to outputs as shown here:

7. Once all drawing elements have been added, save and compile the drawing using

the File | Save/Compile menu item. Errors are reported as they are encountered.

8. Repeat this process if you have additional drawings.

9. Once the drawings are compiled, the drawing icon should be yellow when viewed in the Project Explorer. If a drawing icon is red, the compile was not successful. Return to the drawing, fix any errors, and recompile.

Note: For more information about Function Blocks, please refer to the Function Blocks manual located at the following path: <installation_directory>\Documentation\Function Blocks Document.pdf.


Page 194 of 287


Downloading to the Process Simulator Applies to: Hybrid and Process Controllers

Now that the drawings have been compiled, they can be checked out in the simulator before downloading to the controller.

1. From the Workbench Project Explorer, right-click the controller and select Download Control Strategies to invoke the download screen.

2. Click Get Servers and select DesignerSim.

3. Click Connect to launch DesignerSim.

4. Select the Process option. The Process status is displayed as Not Current. Click Download to initiate the download.

Note: The Perform Initialization option resets all register values in the simulator or controller to their appropriate initial values. Therefore, this option should not be checked when performing an online download.


Page 195 of 287


5. Following a successful download, the Process status label is displayed with a green background.

Note: Ensure that the number in the Per Scan field is one greater than the number in the To field. If it is not, enter the appropriate number into the Per Scan field and then click Update.


Page 196 of 287


Downloading to the Controller Applies to: All Controllers

When a strategy is downloaded, all relevant drawings for a controller are combined into a single, downloadable strategy called a .PRG file.

1. Launch the Workbench.

2. Right-click the controller and select Download Control Strategies.

3. Click Get Servers and select Universal IO Server from the Server drop down list. If the Get Servers option is disabled, click in the Node field and press the space bar to enable the button.

4. Ensure both the node number and IP Addresses are correct by selecting Modify Node Number and Modify TCP/IP Address from the Panel menu. If either is incorrect, return to the IO Configurator and specify the correct address. Click Connect.


Page 197 of 287


5. To initiate a download, select the Process option and then click Download. Following a successful download, the strategy that was marked Not Current is displayed as Current.



Page 198 of 287


Process Control Strategy Checkout Applies to: Hybrid and Process Controllers

Now that a download has been completed, the strategy can be viewed in real time so that tuning parameters can be modified and logic execution can be viewed.

1. In the Project Explorer, right-click the drawing and select View Strategy Realtime.

2. The Strategy Builder is launched and the drawing is displayed with data.

3. To tune data or modify settings, double-click a block and change the values on the

tuning dialog.

4. The Strategy Builder can only be open for one mode: edit or view real time. Therefore, if drawing changes are required, close the drawing, return to the Workbench, and double-click the drawing to open it in edit mode.

5. This completes the development of the Process Control Strategy.


Page 199 of 287


Working with Discrete Control Strategies This section describes the necessary steps to create a discrete control strategy, build the strategy, download it to the simulator and/or the controller, and then debug the strategy using real time data. If you do not have a Hybrid or Logic controller, this section does not apply to you.

Creating a Discrete Control Strategy Applies to: Hybrid and Logic Controllers

To this point, all tags have been created in the Workbench. Because the IEC 61131-3 programming software is a separate application from the Workbench, tags must be mapped before they can be used in Discrete Control.

1. In the Workbench Project Explorer, right-click the controller node and select Map Data | Map Discrete Control Points.


Page 200 of 287


2. The Discrete Control Data Mapping form is displayed. The Available Tags panel, on the right, shows all created tags that can be used in the Discrete Control application. The Mapped Tags panel, on the left, shows all tags that have been mapped in the Discrete Control database.


Page 201 of 287


3. To map a tag, click the tag in the Available Tags panel, drag it into the Mapped Tags panel and release the mouse. (You can also double-click the tag in the Available Tags panel.) Once all desired tags have been mapped, click Save to commit the changes. In our example, map the tag MotorStarter and then click Save. The screen appears as follows:


Page 202 of 287


4. Double-click Create Discrete Control Interface in the Project Explorer to launch the Discrete Control Interface. Programs, functions, and function blocks can now be created or modified.

Note: If a project has already been created in Discrete Control, the Workbench Project Explorer node is labeled Edit Discrete Control Interface.


Page 203 of 287


To create a Program:

1. Right-click the Programs item; select Add Programs and the desired language from the resulting menu. For our example, select LD: Ladder Diagram.

2. Once the language is selected, a new Program node is shown.


Page 204 of 287


Note: For correct system behavior, do not rename the Resource or Configuration nodes.

3. The program can now be renamed. Right-click the new program and select Rename Program. Type SampleLD in the Name field and click OK.

4. Double-click the SampleLD program to launch the editor.

5. Click Yes when prompted to save the changes.

6. The appropriate language editor is launched and logic can now be written.


Page 205 of 287


7. Click the Contact on the left icon from the toolbar to drop a contact. You are prompted for the name.

8. Since no discrete input points have been mapped, we can create an internal

variable to complete the example. Type In1 in the top, left field and click OK. You are prompted to complete the variable definition:


Page 206 of 287


9. Click OK to accept the definition and then click OK again to assign the variable to the contact.

10. To change the contact or coil type, select the Logic element and press the space

bar to cycle through the available contact/coil types.


Page 207 of 287


11. Once logic has been written, select the File | Build Program menu item to compile the program and determine if any errors exist. If so, the errors are displayed in the output window as follows:


Page 208 of 287


12. Correct any errors and do not proceed until there are no errors produced. In our example, the error occurred because no variable was assigned to the contact. To correct this error, double-click the coil and assign it a variable. Select the tag MotorStarter for this purpose. Build the program again and no errors should result.

13. Close the language editor and return to the Discrete Control Interface.


Page 209 of 287


14. Before the program(s) can be downloaded, they must be built so that all programs, functions, and function blocks are linked together into one downloadable image. Select the Project | Build Project/Library menu item to build the program(s) in the Discrete Control Interface.


Page 210 of 287


15. If all errors have been eliminated from the individual programs, the output window appears as follows:

16. If errors are displayed, return to the appropriate program and correct the errors

before returning the Discrete Control Interface to build the project again.

17. Once all errors are removed, you are ready to download the program(s) to the logic simulator or the controller.


Page 211 of 287


Downloading to the Logic Simulator Applies to: Hybrid and Logic Controllers

Now that the drawings have been compiled and the IEC 61131-3 logic built, they can be checked out in the simulator before downloading to the controller.

The Discrete Control Interface has its own simulator, which does not interface with the Process simulator. Therefore, process control strategies and discrete control strategies are simulated on their own. To test the interactions between the two, an actual controller must be used.

To download to the Logic Simulator:

1. Launch the Discrete Control Interface.

2. Select the Debug | Simulation menu item. Several DOS windows are launched and the Discrete Control Interface appears, as shown below, once the Logic Simulator is successfully launched. (Do not close the DOS windows; they close when the simulator is stopped.)


Page 212 of 287


3. Once logic has been debugged, it is necessary to stop the simulation before a program, function, or function block can be changed. To stop the simulation, select the Debug | Stop Simulation menu item.


Page 213 of 287


Downloading to the Controller Applies to: All Controllers

When a strategy is downloaded, all relevant drawings for a controller are combined into a single, downloadable strategy called a .PRG file.

1. Launch the Workbench.

2. Right-click the controller and select Download Control Strategies.

3. Click Get Servers and select Universal IO Server from the Server drop down list.

4. Ensure both the node number and IP Addresses are correct by selecting Modify Node Number and Modify TCP/IP Address from the Panel menu. If either is incorrect, return to the IO Configurator and specify the correct address. Click Connect.


Page 214 of 287


5. To initiate a download, select the Process and/or Discrete Control option and then click Download. Process and Discrete Control can be downloaded independently or simultaneously. If both are being used and one has not changed, only the changed strategy must be downloaded to the controller. Following a successful download, the strategy that was marked Not Current is displayed as Current.



Page 215 of 287


Discrete Control Strategy Checkout Applies to: Hybrid and Logic Controllers

Now that a download has been completed, the strategy can be viewed in real time so that tuning parameters can be modified and logic execution can be viewed.

As with Process Control Strategies, Discrete Control strategies can be viewed with data from either the simulator or the controller.

1. Open the Discrete Control Interface.

2. If the logic will be verified using the simulator, select the Debug | Simulation menu item. Select this option for our example.

If the logic will be verified using the controller, select the Debug | Debug menu item.

3. After starting the appropriate data collector, data can be viewed in the Dictionary or the appropriate logic editor. Using our original ladder diagram example, the real time view appears as follows:


Page 216 of 287


4. To change the values of logic elements in a ladder diagram, double-click the element. A Spy List can be used to monitor the value of one or more tags. This occupies the lower portion of the ladder diagram editor window. To select the variables to display in this window, double-click on the ellipses (…) in the Spy List and select Resource; then select the desired variable. If both In1 and MotorStarter were put into the Spy List, the window appears as follows:

5. After debugging the logic, the simulator or debugger must be stopped before logic

changes can be made. Select either Stop Debug or Stop Simulation from the Debug menu to stop the debugging process. For our example, select Stop Simulation.

6. This completes the development of the Discrete Control Strategy.


Page 217 of 287


Retrieving Data from Other 8000 Controllers Applies to: All Controllers

8000 Controllers share data through peer to peer communications, thereby allowing an 8000 controller to read data from other 8000 controllers. Rather than configuring the producer to send data to each consumer, the consumer is configured with the data it needs from each producer. The following example assumes that a project named Boiler has been created and that the controller Blrcc1_v1, within this project, has a number of tags defined including a tag called ADDRESULT.

Note: If you do not wish to create the Boiler project from scratch, use the previous steps in this tutorial to create the project, controller, and tags. Alternatively, create a new project from the backup project Boiler. After restoring the project, create the AddBlock drawing you made earlier in the Boiler project.

1. Right-click the consumer controller node and select Map Data | Map Points from Remote 8000 Controllers.


Page 218 of 287


2. The Map Peer to Peer Points form is displayed.

3. The right-hand portion of the form lists the tags that can be mapped from

controllers defined in any project. To map a tag, select the Project and Controller containing the desired data from the available fields. In our example, data from the Blrcc1_v1 controller in the Boiler project is retrieved.


Page 219 of 287


4. Once the producer Project (Boiler) and the Controller (blrcc1_v1) are selected, click Get Tags to list all tags defined in the controller.


Page 220 of 287


5. The left-hand portion of the form lists the tags from other controllers that are being referenced by the current controller. To select a tag for retrieval, drag and drop the tag from the Available Remote Tags panel into the Currently Mapped Remote Tags panel or double-click the tag in the Available Remote Tags panel. In our example, map the tag AddResult, as shown below.


Page 221 of 287


6. Repeat this process for each tag to be mapped. Tags can be retrieved from any number of controllers in any number of projects. Once all tags have been mapped, click Save to commit the changes.

7. Perform a controller download to initiate the data exchange. (Please refer to the

Downloading to the Controller section of this document for more information.) Once this is complete, the producer controller(s) send(s) the data to the consumer controller(s) on an exception basis.


Page 222 of 287


8. The data exchanged can also be used on control strategy drawings or in IEC 61131-3 logic. In control strategy drawings, computed analog results that come from other drawings via peer to peer data are referenced on a CNCA block. Similarly, digital results from operations are referenced on a CNCD block. The name of the tag is not the same as the tag mapped from the remote controller. Rather, the prefix for the original tag name is RMT<remote_node_number>_. In our example, the tag ADDRESULT was mapped from a controller with a node number of 50. Therefore, the remote ADDRESULT tag would be referenced in the local controller using the name RMT050_ADDRESULT and shown as below on a control strategy drawing. Open an existing drawing or create a new drawing and drop the CNCA or CNCD block from the Connector catalog, as needed, to use the peer to peer tags.

Note: If IO values are to be retrieved from other drawings, REMOTE_SAIF, REMOTE_SAOF, and REMOTE_D blocks are used for this purpose. These blocks use the project tag definitions in the source controller to scale the values, rather than displaying the values in raw units.


Page 223 of 287


9. Tags can also be mapped to the Discrete Control Interface and then used in IEC 61131-3 programs, functions, and function blocks. Invoke the Discrete Control Data Mapping form to map the peer to peer tags to the Discrete Control Interface. (Refer to the Creating a Discrete Control Strategy section of this guide for more information.)

Note: Because peer to peer is a read-only mechanism, to write data, the destination controller must read from the source controller. For more information, please refer to the Troubleshooting | Tech Notes | Writing Values to E-BIMs section of the Workbench online Help.


Page 224 of 287


Mapping Points from Remote Modbus Devices Applies to: All Controllers

Many applications require data from external sources, such as a flow meter or a turbine governor. In most cases, these devices have an interface through which data can be retrieved from the device or written to the device. If the data can be accessed through Modbus RTU or Modbus TCP, the 8521 controllers can be configured as a Modbus Master and used to read and write the data.

Such points are mapped using the Map Remote Device Points form in the Workbench. For a specific example of mapping remote device points, please refer to Mapping Points from Remote Modbus Devices lab in the Training Guide.

1. To launch this form, right-click the controller and select Map Data | Map Points from Remote Modbus Devices.


Page 225 of 287


2. The Map Remote Device Points form is displayed.

3. Before points can be added, the device must be precisely defined. Enter the

appropriate information into the following fields.

• Device Name – The name you are giving to the device.

• Remote Device Node No. – The Modbus address of the remote device.

• Scan Rate – The frequency at which each remote tag is written to or read from.

• Controller Port – The port that is used by the controllers to communicate with the remote device. This can be one of two serial ports on the controller or over TCP. If TCP is used, the Remote IP address must contain the IP


Page 226 of 287


address of the remote device and the Remote Socket Port No. must contain the socket that the remote device uses to communicate over TCP.

• Response Timeout – The maximum time that the controller awaits a response once the command is sent to the remote device. If the response is not received within this time period, a timeout for the message occurs.

Note: The items above define a logical device. There may be times when some points need to update at one scan rate, while other points need to update at a different scan rate. To meet this need, add another device with the same communication parameters (node number, port settings, packing, command delay, etc.) and modify only the scan rate. This works because a physical device can correspond to one or more logical devices. However, if communication parameters are modified, these changes are ignored. While the device supports multiple scan rates, it only supports one set of communication parameters.

4. Once the device is defined, points for reading and writing data can be defined. Select the appropriate command in the Function drop down list of the Remote Register section.

5. Specify the 1-based offset (NOT full address) in the Offset field. (For example, you would enter 1 for a remote point at 030001.) The system builds the appropriate address by specifying the command and the offset.

6. The Local Register section can now be completed. Select the Register Space for the data and leave the Offset as System Assigned so that the Workbench selects the next available memory area to deposit the data.

Note: For more information regarding configuring the system for these points (configuring the serial ports on the controller for Modbus Master, configuring tabs, and troubleshooting device data), please refer to the Troubleshooting | Tech Notes | Mapping Points from Remote Modbus Devices section of the Workbench online Help.


Page 227 of 287


Linking to InTouch Applies to: Hybrid and Process Controllers

This section describes the process of linking InTouch screens to the Simulator. To do this, InTouch must be configured to pull data from the simulator provided as part of the PAC8000 Workbench (DesignerSim). This association allows you to preview the graphic screens in the absence of actual hardware.

The steps listed below assume that you have InTouch version 7.11, 8.0, or 9.0 installed and that you are familiar with creating projects and windows in InTouch. If you are not, please refer to InTouch online documentation for assistance. Screen shots shown use InTouch version 9.0. If you are running a different version, the screens may be somewhat different.

Connecting to DesignerSim 1. Open the Application Manager.


Page 228 of 287


2. Create a new Wonderware application called WonderwareDemo1. Double-click the new application to open WindowMaker.

3. Once WindowMaker is open, select Special | Access Names.


Page 229 of 287


4. Click Add to create a new Access Name. For our example, use the name Ctrl1 to match the name of the controller created earlier in the Project Tutorial.

5. Fill in the of the fields as follows:

Node Name: The node name references the computer on which the IO Server runs. In our example, this is the local computer, so leave it blank.

Application Name: The name of the IO Server used to provide data to InTouch. For the Simulator, the application name is DesignerSim.

Topic Name: The controller from which data is retrieved. This must match the controller name created in the PAC8000 Workbench in both spelling and capitalization. For our example, use Ctrl1.

Which protocol to use: The simulator supports DDE; select this option for our example.

When to advise server: Select Advise only active items for our example.


Page 230 of 287


Once the data has been entered, your screen appears as follows:

6. Click OK and then click Close on the Access Names window. You are now

ready to import tags and create windows.


Page 231 of 287


Connecting to the Universal IO Server Applies to: All Controllers

This section describes the process of linking InTouch screens to the controller. To do this, InTouch must be configured to pull data from the Universal IO Server (also known as StacServer). This association enables the HMI screens to be updated with live data from the controller.

The steps listed below assume that you have InTouch version 7.11, 8.0, or 9.0 installed and that you are familiar with creating projects and windows in InTouch. If you are not, please refer to InTouch online documentation for assistance. Screen shots shown use InTouch version 9.0. If you are running a different version, the screens may be somewhat different.

1. Open the Application Manager.


Page 232 of 287


2. Create a new Wonderware application entitled WonderwareDemo1. Double-click the new application to open WindowMaker.

3. Once WindowMaker is open, select Special | Access Names.


Page 233 of 287


4. Click Add to create a new Access Name. For our example, use the name Ctrl1 to match the name of the controller created earlier in the Project Tutorial.

5. Fill in the of the fields as follows:

Node Name: The node name references the computer on which the IO Server runs. In our example, this is the local computer, so leave it blank.

Application Name: The name of the IO Server used to provide data to InTouch. For the controller, the application name is StacServer.

Topic Name: The controller from which data is retrieved. This must match the controller name created in the PAC8000 Workbench in both spelling and capitalization. For our example, use Ctrl1.

Which protocol to use: When linking InTouch to the controller using the Universal IO Server, the preferred protocol is SuiteLink.

When to advise server: Select Advise only active items for our example.


Page 234 of 287


Once the data has been entered, your screen appears as follows:

6. Click OK and then click Close on the Access Names window. You are now ready

to import tags and create windows.

Note: Configuration of the Universal IO Server is not required, as this occurs when Connect is clicked on the PAC8000 Workbench download form. (See Downloading to the Controller.) Ensure that you set the Universal IO Server to start automatically, using the services program available from Control Panel | Administrative Tools.


Page 235 of 287


Importing Tags into HMIs

Importing Tags into Cimplicity Included with your purchase of PPS is a utility (CLIE_Tool.exe) that automates the import of PAC8000 tags into the Cimplicity system. This utility can be executed manually or automatically following a download to a controller to generate a csv file with all of the HMI tag data. The tag data can be imported either in offline or dynamic mode. In dynamic mode, the data will be updated in a running system. Since the import is slower in dynamic mode, an option is available to only update those tags that have been added or edited since the last successful import. For further information, please refer to the online Help file included with the CLIE_Tool.

Importing Tags into iFIX Included with your purchase of PPS is a utility (8000_to_iFIX_CSV.exe) that automates the import of PAC8000 tags into the iFIX system. This utility can be executed manually or automatically following a download to a controller. Following the generation of the standard csv file, the file is converted into iFIX format using the 8000_to_iFIX_CSV.exe utility. Following the conversion, this data can optionally be exported to iFIX automatically. For further information, please refer to the user guide (8000_to_iFIX CSV File User Guide.pdf) included with the utility.

Importing Tags into Wonderware 1. Start the Wonderware InTouch application.

2. Click the DBLOAD icon in the toolbar.


Page 236 of 287


3. When the dialog box appears, browse for the CSV file that was created for the controller. This file is located at the following path: <installation_drive>:\Program Files\8000\Control Center\Projects\Proj_MyFirstProject\Ctrl_Ctrl1\CTRL1.CSV. For non-EBIM controller types, this file is named CCCC.CSV, where CCCC is the controller name. For EBIM controller types, this file is named IO_ONLY_WW.CSV.

4. Click OK to import the data values.

5. WindowMaker and WindowViewer cannot be running when performing a DBLOAD. If tags must be imported with InTouch active, use the Tag Import Wizard.

Note: For more information regarding Wonderware Wizards, please refer to the Workbench Wizards manual.


Page 237 of 287


Additional Information The Project Tutorial has taken you through the process of creating, downloading, and troubleshooting a basic control strategy. Due to the high-level nature of this Getting Started Guide, you will certainly require additional information as you become more familiar with the Workbench. Some common functions for which you may require additional resources include:

• Project Backups - Once the project is complete, it should be backed up so that a zip file of the backed up project can be placed in a safe location for subsequent use. This process is discussed in the online Help topic How to Backup a Project and the Backing up a Project lab in the Training Guide.

• Reports - Please refer to the Reports section in the online Help or Reports section in the Training Guide for a complete discussion of the reporting functions that are built into the Workbench.

• Diagnostics and Troubleshooting - A detailed discussion of troubleshooting and maintenance features is available in the Maintenance course. For more information about this course, please visit the Website: www.ge-ip.com/support.

• HMI Graphics and Alarming - Please refer to the documentation that comes with your HMI for a detailed discussion of these features. If your HMI is InTouch, IO and Controller tags are set up to automatically alarm. A detailed discussion can be found in the External Application/HMI Interface section of the online Help.

• Training - GE offers a comprehensive set of training classes for those who will be using the PAC8000 products. For more information about these courses, please visit the Website: www.ge-ip.com/support.


Page 238 of 287

http://www.ge-ip.com/support

http://www.ge-ip.com/support


Glossary 8000 IO Configurator – Configures the system hardware (controllers and IO modules) for a controller.

8000 Process IO System – Control system comprised of a controller and IO modules.

8521 – Product number of the controller.

.NET Framework – Microsoft technology used in some of the PAC8000 Workbench components.

Basic Input/Output System (BIOS) – Area of the PC that monitors and controls all system hardware.

Basic Support – PAC8000 support program that provides responses to your product questions on the next business day.

Coil – Basic discrete output element in IEC 61131-3 Ladder Diagram programming.

Consumer – Uses data from one or more producing controllers.

Contact – Basic discrete input element in IEC 61131-3 Ladder Diagram programming.

Control Platform – Controller hardware upon which control strategies execute.

Control Strategy – Logic that executes within a controller to perform a task, e.g. controlling a valve, starting and stopping a motor, etc.

Controller – Processor that executes control strategies and process IO.

Controller Statistics – Workbench feature that displays scan time breakdown, system parameters, and event logs.

Custom Reports – User-created reports with customized output to fit all documentation needs

Data Entry Panel – Right-hand pane of the Workbench. As specific tasks are selected in the Project Explorer, the Data Entry Panel changes to facilitate data entry.

Database Maintenance Utility – Workbench utility that allows for maintenance tasks on the database, e.g. reload, attach, de-attach, etc. This utility should only be used with assistance from technical support.

Demo mode – Workbench mode that executes when no license file has been obtained. In this mode, downloads to the controller are disabled, but all other functions are available.


Page 239 of 287


DesignerSim – Enables the control system designer to test control strategies in a single controller without the need of physical hardware.

Discrete Control – The IEC 61131-3 programming environment.

Dynamic Link Libraries (dll) – Programming unit that provides functions or information to other programs.

Ethernet BIM – Controller type that functions as a remote IO scanner, as no control strategies are supported.

Executable File (exe) – File that can run directly on a computer.

Floating Point – IEEE precision numbers that are represented in two consecutive registers.

Function Block – Unit of code that uses inputs to compute one or more output(s). Examples of function blocks include PID and motor control.

HART – Communication protocol that places digital information on top of a 4-20mA signal, allowing a transmitter to send up to four data values in addition to the normal 4-20mA signal.

Human Machine Interface (HMI) – Graphical view of the process normally presented to the operator, consisting of items such as value displays, animation, and trends.

Hybrid Controller – Controller type that supports both Process (Advanced Function Blocks, such as PID and Motor Control) and Logic (IEC 61131-3) control strategies.

Hybrid Workbench – Licensed version of the workbench that supports creating control strategies in both Process (Advanced Function Blocks, such as PID and Motor Control) and Logic (IEC 61131-3) languages.

Hysteresis – Prevents alarms from recurring when the value is hovering close to the set point.

IEC 61131-3 – International standard that defines how certain programming languages and their attributes should behave.

IEC languages – Ladder Diagram, Structured Text, Instruction List, Function Block Diagram, and Sequential Function Chart.

InBatch – Invensys’s S88 compliant batch execution engine.

Industrial SQL Server – Invensys’s historian.

Integer – Number that can be represented in a single register.


Page 240 of 287


InTouch – Invensys’s HMI product.

IP Address – An identifier for a computer or other device (printer, plotter, etc.) on a TCP/IP network.

Logic Controller – Controller type that executes only Discrete Logic.

Logic Workbench – IEC 61131-3 programming environment included in Hybrid and Logic Controllers.

Matrikon – OPC client that is installable from the Additional Programs section of the Product Installation CD.

Media Access Control Address (MAC Address) – Unique address that identifies each device on a network.

Microsoft Desktop Engine (MSDE) – Allows the PAC8000 Workbench to access MS-SQL type databases.

Modbus RTU – Serial communication protocol widely used in the industrial automation industry.

Modbus TCP/IP – Modbus over Ethernet.

Module – Physical IO device that provides data to the controller.

Module Channel – Portion of a module that is connected to the physical field device, i.e., transmitter, positioner, etc.

Network Configurator – Network management tool used to assign IP addresses to unconfigured controllers and show network information for all controllers on a process network.

Node Number – Modbus address of the controller.

OPC – Object Linking and Embedding (OLE) for Process Control.

Peer to Peer – Mechanism that allows controllers to exchange data without the need for additional programming.

PID Loop – Process control function block that drives an output based on the difference between the measured process variable and the desired setpoint.

Premium Support – PAC8000 support program that routes your calls, emails, or faxes to an engineer as soon as one is available within normal business hours.

Process Controller – Controller type that supports Process control strategies (Advanced Function Blocks, such as PID and Motor Control).


Page 241 of 287


Process Workbench – Version of the Workbench that supports creating strategies in the Process language (Advanced Function Blocks, such as PID and Motor Control).

Producer – Supplies data to one or more consuming controllers.

Project Explorer – Located in the left-hand pane of the Workbench; assists in adding controllers, drawings, tags, modules, etc.

Project Tags – Names and attributes assigned to channels on IO modules.

Real Time – Viewing control strategies with data updating as soon as it is available from the controller or simulator.

Redundant Controller – Two controllers running in lockstep. The standby controller continually monitors the health of the master controller so it can take over within the same scan if the master controller fails.

Sequence of Events (SOE) – Sequence of Events data gives an accurate time for event occurrence, along with the event value and other useful information. This data can then be used to help determine a specific order of occurrence.

Simplex Controller – Single controller used to execute control strategies and process IO. Systems can be made redundant by adding a second controller.

Simulator (DesignerSim) – Enables the control system designer to test control strategies in a single controller, without the need of physical hardware.

StacServer – Application name for the Universal IO Server. The Modbus TCP/IP and OPC server that comes with the PAC8000 Workbench.

Standard Reports – Reports that are shipped with the product and pertain to either a project or a controller.

Strategy Builder – Process control logic diagrams are developed here by selecting the appropriate function blocks, assigning symbolic tags, and then connecting the blocks with analog or digital lines.

Strategy Viewer – Facilitates the animation of logic diagrams with either simulated or live real time process data.

SuiteLink – Communication protocol used within InTouch to communicate with devices on either a local machine or a remote node.

Universal IO Server – Modbus TCP/IP and OPC server that comes with the PAC8000 Workbench.


Page 242 of 287


Wizard – Mechanism for gathering operator input to some of the more complex function blocks of Process Control.

Wonderware – Suite of products that include InTouch, InSQL, and InBatch.

Workbench – Application that provides the foundation for defining a project and all of its components: tags, hardware configuration, tables, and control logic.


Page 243 of 287

MTL8000 - 2/2 I/O modules General purpose and 2/2 applications (including SafetyNet)

Instruction Manual

PROVISIONAL INM8100

Page 244 of 287

Page 245 of 287

Contents INM8100–18 June 2008

Related documents.......................................................................................................................... iv IMPORTANT NOTE ..................................................................................................................... iv

INTRODUCTION................................................................................................................ 1 Process I/O ...................................................................................................................................... 1 Application “code” .......................................................................................................................... 2 MTL8000 COMPONENTS............................................................................................................. 3 Field terminals ................................................................................................................................. 7 System Design................................................................................................................................. 8 Enclosures ....................................................................................................................................... 8 Planning........................................................................................................................................... 8 Summary ......................................................................................................................................... 8 Tools Required ................................................................................................................................ 8 Health and Safety ............................................................................................................................ 9

THE SYSTEM TYPES ...................................................................................................... 10 a) General purpose (GP) ................................................................................................................ 10 b) 2/2 system ................................................................................................................................. 11 c) Combined 2/2 and 2/1 system ................................................................................................... 11

THE INSTALLATION PROCESS................................................................................... 12 Fitting Cable Trunking .................................................................................................................. 12 Mounting carriers .......................................................................................................................... 12 Power supply connections ............................................................................................................. 14 Carrier Extenders........................................................................................................................... 17 Field Terminals.............................................................................................................................. 18 Field Circuit Wiring ...................................................................................................................... 22 Fitting I/O modules........................................................................................................................ 23

WIRING AND CABLING GUIDELINES....................................................................... 24 Installation and cable routing guidelines ....................................................................................... 24 Protective circuits for Inductive Field Devices.............................................................................. 24

MAINTENANCE ............................................................................................................... 26 Fuses.............................................................................................................................................. 26

APPENDIX 1 ...................................................................................................................... 27 Mounting Dimensions ................................................................................................................... 27 Controllers ..................................................................................................................................... 28 8-unit width ................................................................................................................................... 29 4-unit width ................................................................................................................................... 30 2-unit width ................................................................................................................................... 30 1-unit width ................................................................................................................................... 31

APPENDIX 2 ...................................................................................................................... 32 Field Terminal connections ........................................................................................................... 32

APPENDIX 3 ...................................................................................................................... 34 Glossary of special terms............................................................................................................... 34

APPENDIX 4 ...................................................................................................................... 35 ATEX information......................................................................................................................... 35

iii Page 246 of 287

Related documents The following MTL documents are related to the instructions provided in this manual and are available upon request, or may be downloaded from the MTL website: http:www.mtl-inst.com

MTL Process Connections Catalogue

Instruction Manuals

INM8455 BIM Configuration Software

INM8502 Profibus-DP BIM

INM8505 Modbus BIM

INM8521 Controller – System manual

INM8512 HART Interface module

INM8200 Installing I/O modules (2/1 applications)

INM8900 MTL8000 Power Supplies - Configuration and Installation

System Specifier’s Guide

SSG8002 System Specification Guide - Modular I/O

Application Notes

AN8001 Code of practice - Selection, installation and maintenance of MTL8000 systems in Zone 2 hazardous areas

AN8002 Modbus Communications Manual

AN8004 Using DC outputs with inductive loads

IMPORTANT NOTE

Use of equipment in hazardous areas In common with all other electrical apparatus installed in hazardous areas, this apparatus must only be installed, operated and maintained by competent personnel. Such personnel shall have undergone training, which included instruction on the various types of protection and installation practices, the relevant rules and regulations, and on the general principles of area classification. Appropriate refresher training shall be given on a regular basis. [See clause 4.2 of EN 60079-17].

This instruction manual supplements the requirements of nationally accepted codes of practice, for example, IEC/EN 60079-14 in Europe and the National Electrical Code, combined with ANSI/ISA-RP 12.6 in the USA. All installations should comply with the relevant sections of these codes.

In addition, particular industries or end users may have specific requirements relating to the safety of their installations, and these requirements should also be met.

For ATEX information relating to this equipment, see Appendix 4.

iv Page 247 of 287

Introduction

Figure 1 - MTL8000 I/O modules and field terminals on an 8-way carrier

MTL8000 I/O modules provide the important interface between the remote field sensors, or actuators, and the controller. Capable of being located in the field, close to the field devices, they allow the full benefit of distributed I/O to be realised.

Process I/O Previous conventional wiring practice required individual cable pairs to be wired between each field device and the control room. This arrangement was inflexible, time-consuming and, most of all, costly. Distributed I/O provides more flexibility and reduces installation time and cost. These benefits have been proven in factory automation applications with PLC-type I/O and the same benefits are now enjoyed in the process control industries with the use of MTL8000 Process I/O.

Rugged, easy to maintain and capable of satisfying hazardous area applications, the MTL8000 provides a solution for all process I/O within one family of products. Compatibility with emerging fieldbus types is ensured by a choice of bus and LAN interfaces, and many features, normally supplied only by means of add-ons, are engineered into the standard product.

General purpose applications Process control has applications in many industries: water treatment, steel making, brewing, power generation, etc., all of which can have harsh plant environments. MTL8000 is specifically designed to withstand such environments and these applications are referred to as general purpose.

Hazardous area applications Industries, such as oil exploration and refining and chemical and pharmaceutical manufacturing have environments that may contain explosive gases. Use of equipment in such areas is referred to as a hazardous area application. MTL is a world leader in technology and equipment for use in hazardous areas and that experience is of major value to users requiring process control equipment for such applications.

1 Page 248 of 287

Application “code” The difference between general purpose and hazardous area applications are illustrated in the diagram below. As may be seen, the applications can be mixed within a single system – and even in a single location.

Div 2Zone 2

hazardous areaSafe

i.e. non hazardous area

Div 1Zone 1

hazardous area

Div 1Zone 0

hazardous area

a) General purpose

b) Zone 2 / Div 2field wiring

c) Zone 2 / Div 2 mounting & field wiring

d) Zone 2 / Div 2 mounting Zone 1 / Div 1 field wiring

e) Zone 2 / Div 2 mounting Zone 0 / Div 1 field wiring

Figure 2 - MTL8000 application options

An application “code” has been adopted that helps users to identify the type of MTL8000 Series equipment for their particular application. As well as general purpose, three equipment applications are defined – “2/2”, “2/1” and “1/1”.

2 / 2 Location of

node

e.g. Division 2or Zone 2

Field wiring location

e.g. Division 2 or Zone 2

The two numerals and their usage have a particular meaning as follows:

♦ The first figure represents the most hazardous type of area in which the equipment can be mounted (without additional hazard protection)

♦ The second figure represents the most hazardous type of area from which the field wiring can originate. Please note that Division 1 field wiring applications also include Zone 0 and Zone 1.

The diagram above illustrates these situations and, by understanding this terminology, the correct type of equipment can be chosen to suit a specific application.

This manual deals with general purpose and 2/2 applications ONLY,

i.e. the types shown in a), b) and c) above

IMPORTANT NOTE

All general purpose applications should use 2/2 products. This equipment represents a base level for

all applications. It is used for all general purpose work even though it has been designed to be mounted

in Zone 2 or Division 2 hazard areas and will accept field wiring that originates in the same, or non-

hazardous (i.e. safe), areas.

2 Page 249 of 287

MTL8000 COMPONENTS

Bus Interface Modules and Controllers Bus Interface Modules (BIM) and Controllers provide the governing element for an MTL8000 node. BIMs are currently available to operate as slaves under Modbus and Profibus-DP bus protocols. The more intelligent Controller provides a higher level of control and can assume the role of DCS or PLC operating directly off the Enterprise level LAN.

Bus Interface Modules A Bus Interface Module (BIM) is used to communicate with a host controller, such as a PLC.

Figure 3 - 8505-BI-MB - Modbus Bus Interface Module

Different BIMs allow MTL8000 to operate with popular fieldbus protocols. The Bus Interface Module is configured with dedicated software (part number 8455-CF-SW). This is used to set the parameters for communication with the host and to configure the BIM and the IO Modules for the particular application.

The following versions of the BIM are currently available:

♦ 8502-BI-DP Profibus DP BIM ♦ 8507-BI-DP Redundant Profibus BIM

♦ 8505-BI-MB Modbus BIM

A range of carriers is available on which to mount the BIM. The carrier is chosen to suit the BIM and then the application. The following types are available.

BIM type Carrier type Model numbers

8502/8505 BIM only 8715-CA-BI

8502/8505 BIM + Node Services Module (NSM) 8718-CA-NS

8502/8505 BIM + DC/DC power supplies + 4 I/O modules 8711-CA-NS and 8712-CA-NS

8507 2 x BIM + DC/DC power supplies 8701-CA-BI

Figure 4 - 8715-CA-BI BIM Carrier

3 Page 250 of 287

Details for installing BIMs and their carriers are provided in the manuals for the respective BIMs. See the section Related Documents on page iv of this manual.

The 8711, 8712 and 8718 carriers are designed to accommodate the 8510-MO-NS Node Services Module. This module has a number of roles. It can store the node configuration – for transfer to another BIM, if necessary; it can be used to define the address of the node, through four rotary switches; finally, it can alert the BIM, and hence the Control System, to the failure of power supplies to the node.

Figure 5 - 8510-MO-NS - Node Services Module

Controllers A MOST Controller connects to the Enterprise network via Ethernet and can assume the role of a DCS, a PLC or a Safety system, depending on the type of Controller chosen.

Another version of the Controller is available, that also uses Ethernet as a communication medium, which performs the function of a Bus Interface Module – and is known as an EBIM.

Controller Type Part Number

Hybrid Controller 8521-HC-MT

Process Controller 8521-PC-MT

Logic Controller 8521-LC-MT

Ethernet Modbus Interface Module (EBIM) 8521-EB-MT

SafetyNet Controller (for SIL 2 safety applications) 8851-LC-MT

Figure 6 – Controller type 8521

4 Page 251 of 287

Two Controller carriers are available, the 8750-CA-NS and the 8751-CA-NS. The two are very similar, except that the 8751-CA-NS carrier has a separate “floating” signal ground, for use when earth-leakage detection is required. Fire and gas applications are a typical example of such a requirement.

Carrier type Model numbers

Dual Controller + Power Supply Monitor 8750-CA-NS

Dual Controller + Power Supply Monitor + floating ground option 8751-CA-NS

Figure 7 - 8750-CA-NS carrier

Controller carriers also accommodate the Power Supply Monitor module (8410-NS-PS), which monitors the “power fail” signals available from power supplies, such as the 8913-PS-AC and 8914-PS-AC models available from MTL.

Figure 8 - 8410-NS-PS - Power Supply Monitor

Details on installing these types of carrier are provided in the Controller manual. See the section Related Documents on page iv of this manual.

5 Page 252 of 287

I/O modules and carriers A wide range of I/O modules is available to handle digital and analogue field devices of all types, and careful attention to design has achieved a high channel density – between four and thirty-two I/O channels in a 42 mm width module.

No setup is required to establish a network address for a new module as this is automatically determined by its position on the carrier.

Figure 9 - Discrete output module - 8115-DO-DC

Figure 10 - Carrier, 4-module with earth bar - 8710-CA-04

Carriers provide a mounting for the MTL8000 modules. They support the I/O modules, the field terminals, and carry the address, data and power lines of the internal bus (‘Railbus’). Most carriers can be fitted to standard T-section or G-section DIN rail, or may be surface mounted on a flat panel – see the Installation section.

Multi-pin connectors on their left and right edges enable carriers to be joined end-to-end without the need for additional wiring. A terminal rail/earth bar along the front edge of the carrier accommodates incoming cable screens/shields or protective earth connections.

The carrier types must be chosen to suit the controlling element. Bus interface modules (BIMs) support up to 32 I/O modules but Controllers can communicate with up to 64 I/O modules and consequently require carriers that can support the extended address range. The following table identifies the module carrier types and how they should be used.

Controlling element 4 module capacity 8 module capacity

BIM i.e. 8502-BI-DP, 8505-BI-MB

and 8507-BI-DP

8710-CA-04 8707-CA-08

Controller 8521-xx-MT* or 8851-LC-MT

– 8709-CA-08 (extended addressing)

* xx indicates the specific controller type

6 Page 253 of 287

Carrier Extenders Where carriers forming a node cannot be joined end-to-end on a single length of DIN rail, carrier extenders enable continuity of power and signal bus through flexible cables. The extenders are handed (left and right) to fit the I/O carriers and can support 32- or 64-way addressing. Carrier extenders suitable for General purpose and 2/2 applications are:

♦ 8020-CE-RH Carrier Extender ♦ 8021-CE-LH Carrier Extender

Figure 11 - Carrier extender, 8021-CE-LH

The connections between Carrier Extenders are made by Extender Cables, which are available in a number of lengths.

♦ 0.35m Carrier Extender Cable Part Number: 8001-CC-35 ♦ 0.85m Carrier Extender Cable Part Number: 8002-CC-85 ♦ 1.2m Carrier Extender Cable Part Number: 8003-CC-12

Field terminals Field terminals (one per I/O module) snap onto the carrier. These accept field wiring without the need for additional terminals or connections and may be changed easily if damaged in the field.

A comprehensive mechanical keying system ensures that equipment safety is maintained.

The following field terminals can be used on carriers for general purpose and 2/2 applications.

♦ 8601-FT-NI (non-incendive) ♦ 8608-FT-NI (universal, non-incendive)*

♦ 8602-FT-ST (standard) ♦ 8610-FT-NA (non-arcing)

♦ 8603-FT-FU (non-incendive fused) ♦ 8611-FT-FU (non-arcing fused)

♦ 8604-FT-FU (fused) ♦ 8615-FT-4W (4-wire transmitter)

♦ 8605-FT-TC (4-channel thermocouple) ♦ 8617-FT-NI (16/30-channel DI)

♦ 8606-FT-RT (4-channel RTD) ♦ 8618-FT-MT (16-pin, IDC connector)

♦ 8607-FT-TC (universal, thermocouple)* ♦ 8619-FT-MT (44-pin, IDC connector) * Please refer to Technical Support Note TSN113, which describes how to use the 8607 and 8608 field terminals. This document is available from the MTL website: www.mtl-inst.com.

The field terminal most suitable for a module and its application is shown on the module’s data sheet

Figure 12 - Field terminals, 4 or 8 channel (left), 16/30 channel (middle) and 32 channel IDC

7 Page 254 of 287

http://www.mtl-inst.com/

System Design By the time the equipment is ready for installation, it is asaccordance with the MTL System Specifier’s Guide. Thmodules and field terminals will be required, or are suitasensors and actuators that will be wired to the node. Pcalculated to satisfy the needs of the I/O modules, plus anThe number of carriers to mount all of the modules will hav

Enclosures MTL8000 and MOST equipment can be located out in thsome form of protection from the weather and the danger o

Enclosures for this purpose can be supplied on request byprovide an adequate level of ingress protection and isappropriate to the environment will be satisfactory.

Planning Before beginning installation consider the following points♦ Additional carriers may be required at a later stage. W

carriers, consider making provision for such extension♦ Where possible, when routing the wiring and a

allowances for the carriers, carrier extenders and exten♦ Make adequate allowance for the working space to tri♦ Try to ensure that you have all the required parts to ha♦ Ensure that you have a 3.5 mm flat-bladed screwdriv

the necessary tools for mounting the enclosure, DIN also be required for preparing cable-ends.

Summary Installing an MTL8000 (or MOST) node is straight forwprocedures, a node may be constructed in a wiring shop aconstructed and installed in-situ.

A typical installation could proceed as follows (greater deta

1. Install trunking, making allowance for MTL8000 carrfitting cable-ends.

2. Install the DIN rails (or if DIN rail mounting is notsurface).

3. Fit the carriers (and any carrier extenders) to the DIN 4. Fit the field terminals. 5. Switch off all power supplies to the node and make sa6. Trim field wiring cable-ends and connect into the fiel

modules are fitted). Cable-ends should be tagged to id7. Trim cable ends of power supplies and connect to the 8. Fit carrier extender cables.

Tools Required MTL8000 and MOST equipment is designed to be installed

Apart from tools for the mounting and preparation of the etools required to mount and cable the equipment are:

♦ A 3.5 mm flat-bladed screwdriver.

♦ A 2 mm flat-bladed screwdriver.

8

sumed that the system has been designed in is process will have established which I/O ble, for the application based upon the field ower supply requirements will have been y additional demand for field circuit power. e been calculated also.

e process plant. In this event, it will require f physical damage.

MTL, but any enclosure that is designed to capable of withstanding physical damage

: hen positioning the trunking and MTL8000

s or modifications. ssociated trunking, make generous space sion cables.

m and insert cable-ends. nd before starting. er, a 2 mm flat-bladed screwdriver, and all

rails (if used) and cable trunking. Tools will

ard. Depending on circumstances and work nd then taken on site for installation or fully

il is available in later sections):

iers and required clearance for trimming and

used, drill mounting holes in the mounting

rails (or fit carriers to the mounting surface).

fe. d terminals (this could also be done after the entify the associated instrument/actuator. relevant terminals.

with the minimum of tools.

nclosure and preparing cable-ends, the only

Page 255 of 287

Health and Safety Before commencing installation of the equipment:

♦ Ensure that all installation work is carried out in accordance with all relevant local standards, codes of practice and site regulations and any special requirements stated in this manual.

♦ Check that the module functions are correct for the applications.

♦ Take care to avoid damaging the pins at all connector interfaces.

♦ Ensure that all relevant power supplies have been made SAFE

Additional information on each component,

including any special conditions of use, is provided in Appendix 4.

IMPORTANT: Identify any special conditions of use before installing.

For further electrical data please refer to the component’s Declaration of Conformity.

Underwriters Laboratories

Listing by Underwriters Laboratories to UL 61010-1 under control number 3MGU requires the following information to be provided: -

If the equipment is used in a manner not specified by MTL, the protection provided by the equipment may be impaired.

The Caution symbol appears on the carriers of the system. This symbol indicates that the following ratings apply: -

System

The controller must be enclosed within a panel. Use NEC Class 1 wiring between terminals on field terminal assemblies and “other circuits” (ie sensor circuits). The equipment shall be marked with the maximum voltage and current rating of the branch-circuit overcurrent protective device corresponding to the size of the internal wire.

Field Terminal Assemblies

Field terminal assemblies with screw-clamp terminals have maximum ratings of 265V ac, 3A per channel, and where fitted a fuse rating of 2A. The actual limitations are further defined by the specifications of the I/O modules with which they are used. Copper wiring must be used with these field terminals, and the conductor sizes permitted are restricted to 26 to 14 AWG (0.13 to 2.1mm2).

Bussed Field Power connections

A single BFP connector on an 8000 2/2 carrier can provide two independent power rails, each rail supplying two adjacent modules. The maximum rating of this connector is 265V ac and 15A.

The Controllers are intended for panel mounting.

9 Page 256 of 287

The system types

Before beginning to assemble the physical system the user must be aware of the type of system that is being installed. The assembly process can be a little different for each of the following installations.

a) General purpose (GP)

b) 2/2 system

c) Combined 2/2 and 2/1 system

There follows a brief description of the key elements required to implement these types. Detailed installation information is provided, beginning at the next section.

a) General purpose (GP)

CarrierExtender

(LH)

8-module carrier

AdditionalI/ O modulesto system limit

(see text)

8-module carrier4-module carrier(not available with

extended addressing)

Bussed Field Power

Bussed Field PowerD.C. power linkfrom otherextender

CarrierExtender

(RH)

D.C. power linkto otherextender

Control elementi.e. BIM or

Controller(s)

(Zone 2 / Div 2)

Figure 13 - I/O modules – general purpose application

An MTL8000 (or MOST) node for use in a general purpose environment may look similar to the installation shown above. The installation might be larger or smaller but most of the component parts shown above will be used.

Construction of a node normally starts with the control element, i.e. the BIM or the Controller(s). Both types require a carrier and there is a choice of carrier according to the application.

The I/O modules follow the “control” carrier and are fitted on four or eight-way carriers. Note however that 4-way carriers are not available for extended address (i.e. 64 slot) applications.

Few mounting enclosure are wide enough to continue a long line of carriers and modules, so a second line can be started to take the additional modules, as shown above. Carrier extenders are fitted, a right-hand version followed by a left-hand version, to extend the run of carriers onto a second row. A flexible cable carrying the Railbus signals links the two together and power supplies are maintained through cables connected to the screw terminals.

A 2/2 node requires a 12V DC supply for the “System Power” and – where used – M0OST Controllers require an additional direct connection to a 12Vdc supply. The 12V DC System Power can be sourced from any regulated bulk power supply, or the dedicated MTL power supplies can be used 8913-PS-AC for all node types and 8920-PS-AC for MTL8000.

(Note: SIL2 SafetyNet installations must use either: 8913-PS-DC power supplies for System and Controller power and 8914-PS-DC power supplies for Bussed Field Power; or alternatives as defined in the TÜV approved safety manual SM8800, in order for the available certification to be valid.) For full details on the design of power supply systems for MTL8000 see Instruction Manual INM8900.

10 Page 257 of 287

Bussed Field Power (BFP) is the means by which field power is provided, when it is required. Depending on the IO Module(s) chosen, BFP may be any voltage from 2V to 60V DC and from 20V to 265Vac. The chosen supply is connected to the rear of the carrier and this is then distributed to four modules on the carrier. The modules can then route the power to the field devices via the field terminals.

For applications requiring BFP at 24V DC, the 8914-PS-AC can be used (and must be used in SafetyNet applications).

b) 2/2 system This is very similar to the general purpose installation described above. The same diagram shows the key features for this installation but some of the field terminals may have been specified as non-incendive or non-arcing to comply with safety regulations for the field wiring. This has no effect on the installation process.

c) Combined 2/2 and 2/1 system

2/ 1 CarrierExtender

(RH)

2/ 1CarrierExtender

(RH)

18–36V dcpower

18–36V dcpower

I/ O modulepower supply

Optional n+1redundant I/ O module

power supply

DINrail


[EEx ia]

Railbus IsolatorModule and

Carrier

Extendercables


[EEx ia]

8-module carrier(Zone 2/ Div 2 field wiring)

Bussed Field Power

Control elementi.e. BIM or

Controller(s)

(Zone 2/ Div 2)

AdditionalI/ O modulesto system limit

(see text)

NOTE

For full details on installing the 2/1 equipment and modules see MTL publication INM8200 as shown in Related Documents on page iv of this manual.

Some nodes are designed to accept Zone 2/Div 2 and Zone 1/Div 1 field wiring. This requires a combination of 2/2 and 2/1 MTL8000 equipment, which must always be installed in the following configuration.

Control element – 2/2 modules – Isolator – 2/1 modules

Installation starts with the control element, it then continues with 2/2 I/O module carriers, until all of the required 2/2 modules have been accommodated.

A Railbus Isolator is then installed to provide the necessary protective isolation for the IS field wiring that will follow; continue using 2/1 I/O modules on appropriate 2/1 carriers (see Instruction Manual INM8200 for information on installing all of these components).

If carrier extenders are required (see above), the appropriate extenders (2/2 or 2/1) must be used to suit the carriers involved. There is no possibility of using the wrong ones as the system is designed to prevent this.

11 Page 258 of 287

The Installation Process

The carriers can be installed directly to a flat panel or to T- or G-section DIN rail.

Trunking for power supply wiring

Trunking for field circuit wiring

or

G-section DIN rail

T-section DIN rail

156mm (min.)

102mm (min.)

35mm (min.)

55mm (min.)

Figure 14 - Recommended minimum clearance between carriers and cable trunking

Fitting Cable Trunking Cable trunking is recommended for management of the power supply and field wiring. Space for this trunking must be considered when installing the carriers.

See the diagram above for the recommended minimum spacing between a carrier and any adjacent cable trunking. The extra spacing for the power supply cabling allows for the insertion and removal of power connectors.

Mounting carriers

Flat panel mounting Prepare fixing holes in the panel – see Appendix 1 for carrier dimensions and drilling positions.

Carrier hole dimensions are given in Figure 15 below.

Figure 15 - Fixing hole dimensions on moulded carriers

• Mount a flat washer on an M4 screw of the required length, and insert one of these in each mounting hole.

• Ensure that the carrier is correctly orientated and then place it in position.

• Tighten the screws to fix it securely.

12 Page 259 of 287

DIN-rail mounting Carriers may be mounted on T-section or G-section DIN rail- see Appendix 1 for carrier dimensions.

Distance between rail fixings The following table gives the recommended distance between fixings for a fully loaded rail.

Rail Type Distance between fixings (max.)

G - section 500 mm

T - section 7.5 mm 150 mm (see notes)

T - section 15 mm 500 mm

T - section 15 mm depth rail is recommended when it is the only means of support in the enclosure. The recommended spacing for rail fixings is shown in the table.

If 7.5 mm rail is used, it must be mounted on a back panel with no spacers between the rail and the panel. Care should be taken to ensure that the screw heads of the fixings for this rail type do not interfere with the carrier mountings. The recommended spacing for rail fixings is shown in the table.

G - section Care should be taken to ensure that the fixings for this rail type do not interfere with the carrier mountings. The recommended spacing for rail fixings is shown in the table. See also the information below on cable trunking.

Fixing carriers to DIN rail ‘Screw and swing nut’ fixings are used to fix the carriers to the DIN rail (see Figure 16). The nut rotates to fit underneath the edge of the DIN rail and further tightening of the screw pulls the nut up against the rail.

Figure 16 - Screw and swing nut fixing method

These fixings are contained within the bodies of the carriers, and access to the screw head is through the holes in the PCB (see Figure 17). The outer two screws are used for T-section rail, and the inner two for G-section.

LOCK

T-sectionrail fixings

G-sectionrail fixings

Figure 17 – DIN-rail fixing positions

IMPORTANT - BEFORE MOUNTING A CARRIER ON THE DIN RAIL:

Give each of the required screws two 360° turns, anticlockwise, with a screwdriver. (This will ensure that the nuts on the underside of the carrier have swung out of the way and are sufficiently retracted.)

13 Page 260 of 287

ATTENTION!

Maximum torque for swing-nut fixing screws = 10 Nm (7.5 ft-lb)

Note: The spacing between each carrier is 3.0 mm

The dimensions for each carrier type are given in Appendix 1.

When mounting carriers: • Ensure that the carrier is correctly orientated and then locate it on the rail.

• Press the carrier to the DIN rail while tightening the fixing screws - do not exceed torque shown above.

• Ensure that adjacent carriers have their Railbus multi-pin plug and socket fully engaged before tightening the fixing screws.

Power supply connections

12V DC “System” supply The 12V DC power for the I/O modules is distributed via the “Railbus” multipin connector. This power is provided from the “control” carrier, i.e. the one housing the BIM or Controller, which precedes the I/O module carriers. See the instruction manual INM8900 for details of 12V DC power supplies and how to connect them, and also methods of redundancy.

Bussed field power (BFP) connections Bussed Field Power enables field circuit power to be available direct from the field terminals, thus a simple supply rail connection at the rear of the carrier makes power available to a range of field terminals. This overcomes the inconvenient wiring arrangements associated with some I/O module systems. The system is capable of handling voltages of up to 230V AC (nominal) to the field circuits (depending upon the I/O modules in use).

See the instruction manual INM8900 for further details of bussed field power supplies and redundancy.

If a module requires an additional power rail for the field circuit then this can be provided using the connector(s) at the top/rear edge of the carrier.

8710-CA-048707-CA-08 & 8709-CA-08

8711-CA-NS & 8712-CA-NS

1 2 3 4

1 2 3 41 2 3 4 1 2 3 4

BFP

BFP BFP BFP

Externalsystem power

12Vdc

Figure 18 - Locations of bussed field power connectors

A single connector can provide two independent power rails, each rail supplying two modules. Viewing the carrier as shown above, Supply A will feed the two modules to the right of the connector (1 & 2) and Supply B will feed the two modules to the left (3 & 4). The second terminal for each connection enables the supply to be looped onwards.

The eight-module carrier has two of these connectors on its rear edge; the four-module and the Node Services carrier have only one.

14 Page 261 of 287

PCB mounted plug

– ve(or N)

+ ve(or L)

– ve(or N)

+ ve(or L)

Supply B(modules 3 & 4)

Supply A(modules 1 & 2)

Note: The four broken lines linking adjacent terminals indicate links that exist on the PCB.

Figure 19 - Details of BFP connector

“Bussing” Field Power to additional modules – with a single supply voltage When using a single BFP supply voltage, the BFP connector may be wired to loop the supply to the other half of the connector, and even loop it to another connector on the same carrier or an adjacent one.

If all four modules require the same supply, loop the connections onto the other half of the connector as shown in Figure 20.

The power supply may be further looped to another connector if it is capable of supplying sufficient current.

Add these links tosupply modules 3 & 4

To nextconnector +

(or L)+(or L)

–(or N)Incoming

supply

Supply tomodules1 & 2

Supply tomodules3 & 4

+–

–(or N)

Figure 20 - Single external field supply

“Bussing” Field Power to additional modules – with two power supplies When two different BFP supply voltages are used on one BFP connector, they can also be looped to another BFP connector, as shown in Figure 21.

+ (or L)

– (or N)

+ (or L)

– (or N)

+ (or L)

– (or N)

+ (or L)

– (or N)

Supply 1

Supply 2Supply 1

Supply 2

Figure 21 - Dual external field supplies

Connector wiring The connector must be wired before it is plugged into the carrier.

• Trim back the insulation of each conductor by 15 mm • Check pin assignments • Insert each conductor in turn and tighten the connector screw. Overtightening or applying

excessive pressure to the screw terminal is unnecessary and could damage the connector.

15 Page 262 of 287

The coding key system A coding key system is available to prevent the interchange of Bussed Field Power plugs that carry different voltage levels. The user fits one part of the key system to the header on the carrier and the other to the free plug (see Figure 22).

As two different supplies or voltages can be provided on one plug, i.e. supply A for modules 1& 2 and supply B for modules 3 & 4, appropriate code keys should be fitted to each half of the plug and header.

The keying code chosen by the user should uniquely identify the different voltages that will be applied to the header.

The combination of keys in the plug and header (left) should also be chosen to ensure that a free plug cannot be plugged into the wrong header on the carrier. The plug and header will not connect if the same lettered keys are opposite each other, e.g. ‘A’ opposite ‘a’ will not allow them to connect.

B C DA B C DA

Key positionsfor Supply B

a b c d a b c d

Free plug

Carrier mounted header

Key positionsfor Supply A

Figure 22 - Key coding of BFP connector

As an aid, a code is suggested here, that will uniquely identify the three most commonly used supply voltages. Bear in mind that the choice of key codes, and even the use of key coding, is entirely at the discretion of the user.

Bussed Field Power Supply Voltage

Code

24V DC Header A B C -

Plug - - - d

115V AC Header A B - D

Plug - - c -

230V AC Header A - C D

Plug - b - -

Note: A - C D means keys are fitted to positions A, C and D on the carrier mounted header.

Fitting coding keys The plug and header can be either of two types, each having a particular coding key design. The illustrations at the top of the page show the types, (a) and (b), for both the free plug and the fixed header. The two should not be mixed, i.e. a type (a) plug should not be used with a type (b) header. The keys are supplied on their own plastic tool for ease of insertion.

• Identify the key's positions for the code that you have chosen.

• Using the insertion tool, slide the appropriate key into the appropriate position on the free plug.

• When it is in place, separate it from the insertion tool by bending the tool backwards and forwards until the key breaks away from the insertion tool.

• Repeat the process on the fixed header using the keys for the header.

Note: There is no potential hazard from exposed Bussed Field Power pins on the carrier, as they carry no supply voltage.

16 Page 263 of 287

Carrier Extenders Carrier extenders maintain the internal signal and power bus connections between the carriers when space does not allow the current line of carriers to be continued.

Railbusconnector

DC powerconnector

Extensioncable

connector

Figure 23 - Carrier extender

Right-hand and Left-hand versions The extenders are available in a right or left-hand versions, which relates to the end of the carrier to which they are fitted. The right hand extender is fitted to the end of the line of carriers that requires extending. The left hand one attaches to the 'new' line of carriers that requires the signal and power feed.

Carrier Extender – Right hand 8020-CE-RH

Carrier Extender – Left hand 8021-CE-LH A flexible cable is used to connect a pair of Cable Extenders and thus maintain the bus connection. Extender cables for both application types are available in three lengths, with the following part numbers:

Carrier extension cable, 0.35m 8001-CC-35



Caution: Ensure that no undue strain is placed on extender cables/wiring when installed and that extender cables/wiring are secured with suitable cable clips or routed through adjacent trunking.

8020Carrier

Extender(RH)

8021Carrier

Extender(LH)

HVCC(+ & –)

HVCC(+ & –) Extension

Cable

Figure 24 - Connecting carrier extenders

17 Page 264 of 287

Mounting • Choose extenders, left and right hand, to suit the application

• Check Appendix 1 for fixing and mounting dimensions if panel mounting

• Mount each extender (engaging its multi-pin connector with that of the carrier)

• Tighten fixing screws on extenders

Fitting Railbus Cables • Select a standard cable length (see previous page) that will interconnect the two extenders.

• Ensuring the connector genders are correctly orientated, attach cable to extenders and secure their connector fixing screws.

Continuing D.C. Power The 12V system power connection is continued via screw-terminal blocks on the carrier extenders. The following table identifies the terminal connections.

Note: the –ve connections cross from terminals 6 & 5 (8020) to terminals 1 & 2 (8021) and the signal ground connections do the opposite.

Terminal number Extender type 6 5 4 3 2 1

8020-CE-RH HVCC–

HVCC–

HVCC+

HVCC+

SGND SGND

8021-CE-LH SGND SGND HVCC+

HVCC+

HVCC–

HVCC–

• Identify the extender type (RH or LH) and its the terminal block

• Trim back the insulation of each conductor by 6 mm, or 8 mm if the wires are to be fitted with crimp ferrules.

• Check terminal numbering. (see above).

• Insert each conductor according to the terminal numbering and tighten the screw (clockwise). Do not over-tighten or apply excessive pressure to the terminal as damage could occur.

Carrier earthing/bonding Recommendations on how best to ground the carriers for maximum EMC protection are provided in INM8900 – MTL8000 Power Supplies – see Related Documents on page iv of this manual.

Field Terminals

Types A range of terminal types is available to suit different I/O modules and applications. Some combinations are prohibited and the reasons for this are discussed in the next section entitled "Compatibility of Field Terminal and I/O Module".

IMPORTANT

The installer MUST be aware of the essential difference between the following two types of field terminal:

2/2 - Grey plastic housing - this type is for general purpose and 2/2 use

2/1 - Blue plastic housing – these are used only for 2/1 applications (not discussed here)

Further choices depend upon the type of field device. For example, there are specific ones for use with analog input THCs (thermocouples) and RTDs and also 16-channel DI modules. See the datasheets for further information.

18 Page 265 of 287

Compatibility of Field Terminal and I/O Module Certain combinations of field terminal and module are intended to be incompatible, because:

a) field voltages applied to some terminals could damage certain modules, and vice versa,

b) unsuitable modules must not be fitted for hazardous area use

The following two mechanical methods are employed to prevent a module being fitted to a field terminal assembly that is unsuitable for it.

1. Rotary keys This method protects modules and field circuits from the application of voltages and currents incompatible with their function, and uses a pair of ‘D-shaped’, rotatable keys (see Figure 25).

During installation the installer sets the keys on the field terminal to match the module code. When the keys on the module are correctly set, they engage with the keys on the field terminal.

A

D

B

CE

F1

4

2

35

6

A

D

B

CE

F1

4

2

35

6

A

D

B

CE

F1

4

2

35

6

Key types onfield terminals

Key types onmodules

Non-Incendive(2/2)

Non-Arcing(2/2)

General Purpose

Figure 25 - Key codes on field terminals

Notes

1. The field terminal keys are all shown in the A1 position for illustration only. This is a valid setting only for the general purpose field terminal.

2. The arrows indicate which module types will fit on the respective field terminals. e.g. all module types will fit any of the general purpose field terminals.

The module is coded during manufacture and no further action is required of the installer.

2. Keyways In addition to the basic rotary keys a further key-and-keyway combination is employed to prevent inadvertent fitting of unsuitable modules to field terminals when hazardous-area field wiring is employed. The additional keys are located on the rotary D-shaped keys and the keyways on the fixed D-shaped keys on the module. These do not require any form of setting and will be present, or not, depending upon the type of field terminal, and module, used. (The diagram at the top of the page shows the different types of field terminal and module.)

To set the rotatable keys

• Obtain the field terminal code from the label on the side of the module

• Using a screwdriver, set the two rotatable keys on the field terminal to match the code

A

D

B

CE

F1

4

2

35

6

Non-incendivefield terminal - set to A4

19 Page 266 of 287

Field Terminals - Installation and removal The Field Terminals must be fitted onto the carrier before the modules can be installed. It is recommended that you decide on a keying system (see above) and set the locating key position of each field terminal (and its associated module) prior to fitting.

To fit a field terminal to the carrier

• Locate the lugs in the holes provided on the PCB

• Press the assembly flat onto the carrier

• Slide it towards the middle of the carrier until it clicks into place

To remove a field terminal (see also note below)

• To release the locking mechanism at the rear of the terminal, use a screwdriver, or similar tool, to push the spring catch towards the carrier circuit board. (See picture).

• With the catch depressed, slide the terminal towards the edge of the carrier until it reaches a stop.

• Release the catch then lift (without tilting) the terminal out of the fixing holes.

Note: Earlier field terminals did not have the locking mechanism. These were removed by pressing the terminal to the circuit board, then sliding it towards the edge of the carrier before removal.

Tagging Strip A tagging strip is supplied with the field terminal assembly to assist with the identification of the field circuit connections. The strip has a ‘dovetail’ fitting tab to attach it to the field assembly, and once fitted it may be raised to obtain access to any field wiring fuses, or lowered and latched, to display the wiring identities.

The identity strip locates in the face of the tagging strip and a clear plastic cover is used to protect it.

Mass Termination Assemblies Mass Termination Assemblies (MTAs) offer the user a number of different ways to terminate field wiring. Two versions are available, 16-pin (8618-FT-MT) and 44-pin (8619-FT-MT), both of which provide IDC multi-pin connectors instead of screw terminals.

The Mass Termination Assemblies are particularly useful when legacy systems are being replaced and connections must be made to existing field wiring, junction boxes and marshalling cabinets.

Some standard 1, 2 and 3 metre cables are available from MTL to assist the user; others can be made to order; or users can put together their own custom cables to suit their specific wiring termination requirements.

Mass Termination Assemblies can also be used to interface to signal conditioning units. For example, with devices that require a drive current above the 1A capability of the 8115-DO-DC discrete output module, the 8618-FT-MT can be used to connect to high-current relays.

20 Page 267 of 287

Increasing the current handling capacity of the 8115-DO-DC module is discussed in Technical Support Note TSN112: “Using the 8115-DO-DC with high-current loads”, which is available from the MTL website: www.mtl-inst.com.

In particular, the 44-pin (8619-FT-MT) MTA is required for the 8125/8127 I/O modules to accommodate the full 32-channels and the 8121/8122 modules to accept sixteen 2-wire devices.

The user is recommended to consult the data sheets for individual IDC pinouts on the 8618-FT-MT and the 8619-FT-MT assemblies.

Switch/Proximity Detector Wiring Panel The 8650-FT-PX provides a simple method to terminate up to 32 two-wire field devices. It is DIN-rail mountable and links to the 8619-FT-MT field terminal using a pair of ready terminated, IDC connector cables that have 20 and 24 pin connections. Consult the data sheet for individual IDC pinouts on the 8619-FT-MT.

Figure 26 - 8650-FT-PX wiring panel

Use the following diagram to wire the switches or proximity detectors into the screw terminal connectors. For maximum convenience, there is also provision for cable screens to be terminated and grounded.

Figure 27 - 8650-FT-PX field wiring terminals

Connect +ve terminals to the upper row, –ve to the middle and ground or cable screens to the lowest one. The GND terminals are linked to two M4 screw terminals on the circuit board to provide a convenient method for connecting them to a suitable ground.

8607 and 8608 Field Terminals Technical Support Note TSN113 “Getting the most from 8607 and 8608 field terminals” describes how to use the 8607 and 8608 field terminals. This document is available from the MTL website: www.mtl-inst.com.

21 Page 268 of 287

http://www.mtl-inst.com/

Field Circuit Wiring

Earthing Bar for Cable Screen Terminations

Earth connection to adjacentcarrier or system earth

IncomingField Wiring(with screen)

Figure 28 - Wiring a field terminal

See Appendix for details of the wiring for the individual field terminals.

Cable Termination Field wiring is usually organised in pairs and a pair of cable ends will be wired into the Terminal Block one above the other. If I/O connections do not conform to this refer to the module datasheet.

As the connections are stepped, the lower wire (i.e. even numbered terminals) should be cut 12 mm shorter than the upper one.

• Trim back the insulation on each conductor by 6 mm, unless crimp ferrules are being fitted, in which case the conductor length should be 8 mm

• Check for correct terminal number

• Insert each conductor, according to the terminal numbering, and tighten the screw. Overtightening or applying excessive pressure to the screw terminal is unnecessary and could damage the connector.

• If a signal cable has a screen then this may be terminated in the same way to the earth bar on the front edge of the carrier. See below.

Note: The screen at the field end should be left unterminated.

Carrier Earth Bar The front edge of the carrier, adjacent to the field terminals, contains an earthing bar with screw terminals for the purpose of terminating cable screens, or protective mains earths from field wiring.

Although there is a connection point for every channel they are not always directly below the corresponding channel connection point. However, they are arranged in groups of eight, and therefore easily recognisable.

An additional terminal is provided at each end of the earth bar for interlinking carrier earths, or for connecting them to a central earth point.

Recommendations on how best to ground the carriers for maximum EMC protection are provided in INM8900 – MTL8000 Power Supplies – see Related Documents on page iv of this manual.

22 Page 269 of 287

Fitting I/O modules Once the field terminal assembly is installed, the I/O module can be mounted.

The installer MUST be aware of the following two classifications of I/O module:

• 2/2 - Grey plastic moulding with black legend

• 2/1 - Grey plastic moulding with blue legend

The 2/1 type is used for hazardous area applications (not discussed here). The 2/1 type must be used if the associated field wiring, instruments and actuators are located, without any further protection, within a hazardous area that conforms to Zone 1 (European) or a Division 1(US) classification. An appropriate field terminal must also be used in conjunction with the I/O module.

To fit an I/O Module to the carrier

Rotatable keys onfield terminal

Fixed keys - dependupon module type

Figure 29 - Fitting an I/O module

• Confirm that the module is compatible with the field terminal (see page 19)

• Locate the module on the carrier and field terminal connectors

• Push the module onto the connectors until it is fully seated

• Lock in place with the retaining screw

Do not overtighten otherwise damage could occur.

The maximum torque that can be applied safely is 0.11 Nm (1 in-lb).

NEVER attempt to force a module into place on the carrier or field terminal. this can damage the connector pins which may result in hazardous equipment. If a module does not appear to fit correctly, check the module type again and confirm it is the correct type to suit the field terminal and carrier.

Vacant I/O Module slots I/O module slots can be left unoccupied, with or without field terminals fitted.

23 Page 270 of 287

Wiring and cabling guidelines

Installation and cable routing guidelines Power supply wiring is equally susceptible to induced voltage and current spikes as signal cabling. It should therefore be installed with the same precautions in mind.

Installation practices vary throughout the world and so local rules and practices must be observed. Some general rules for installation are offered below but local rules will always take precedence.

Inside a building To avoid interaction of signals and the influence of power spikes when laying cables and wiring inside a building, EMC rules for minimum clearances between adjacent cabling should be observed.

Outside a building The same rules that apply to wiring and cabling inside a building will apply to wiring outside of a building; however, some additional rules could also be observed:

• Cables should be laid on metal cable trays

• The trays should be electrically connected (preferably at the joints)

• The metal trays should be electrically grounded

• Appropriate measures should be taken, both inside and outside a building, to protect installations from lightning strikes.

Protective circuits for Inductive Field Devices Discrete inputs and outputs may be subjected to induced overvoltages when inductive field devices (e.g. relay coils and contactors) are being switched, or monitored, by them. A typical application might be when an “Emergency Stop” function is wired in series with critical electrical loads. It is advisable that the following protective measures be taken to avoid damage to modules.

Protecting DC discrete input circuits When discrete inputs are used to sense a contact closure in a field device, some form of arc suppression should be used at the contact of the field device. This could be an R-C suppression network (figure a) - sometimes referred to as a “snubber” - or a varistor (figure b). Sizing of the suppression component(s) is load dependent and reference should be made to the manufacturer’s literature. If manufacturer’s information is not available see the notes below on R-C suppression.

a) R-C suppression network

R

C

b) varistor suppression network

Protecting DC discrete output circuits While MTL8000 DC output modules have their own built-in protection it is recommended that some additional form of suppression is added at the field device to avoid EMC problems from the field wiring. A reverse diode (figure c) or an R-C suppressor (see figure a) is often used to protect a relay coil when being switched in a DC circuit.

c) diode suppression network

+

–

24 Page 271 of 287

AC discrete output circuits All of the AC discrete output modules in the MTL8000 series use a zero-crossing technique for switching their outputs which greatly reduces the production of voltage spikes when switching inductive loads. The use of additional external suppression circuits is unlikely to be required.

Calculating values for R-C suppression components If manufacturer’s information is not available the following suggestions may be used to calculate resistor and capacitor values for suppression networks. (The calculations are all based on units of volts and amperes.)

For DC applications:

R (ohms) is sized as R = VDC ÷ Iload

C (µF) is sized as C = Iload x 0.5

For example, when switching 24 V DC with a 500 mA steady state load

R = 24 ÷ 0.5 = 48 Ω

C = 0.5 x 0.5 = 0.25 µF

For AC applications:

R (ohms) is sized as R = Vrms ÷ 0.5

C is sized as 0.5 µF per VA of steady state load

For example, when switching 120 V AC with a 500 mA steady state load

R = 120 ÷ 0.5 = 240 Ω

C = 0.5 x 120 x 0.5 = 30 µF

The rating of these devices should be calculated on the basis of the applied voltages and the load current being switched. If you are in any doubt about choosing these components you are advised to consult MTL or one of our local representatives.

Warning - As mentioned earlier, electrical installation of the MTL8000 must always comply with all relevant local standards, codes of practice and site regulations. Additional rules will apply if the MTL8000 is being used in hazardous environments (i.e. explosive gas or dust).

If the field wiring originates in, or passes through, a hazardous environment then the type of equipment installed, and the wiring practices used, will be very different and the user is referred to alternative installation guides which deal with these practices.

25 Page 272 of 287

MAINTENANCE

Fuses The only user-replaceable fuses in MTL8000 Series products are those used in the fused Field Terminals. These fuses are marked with their rating and only replacements of the same rating may be used. Replacements are available from Measurement Technology Limited either directly or via their agents.

All other fuses are located inside the products and specialist equipment is necessary to effect their replacement. Products suspected of having damaged internal fuses (or any other internal fault) should be returned to Measurement Technology Limited, or one of their agents, for repair.

26 Page 273 of 287

Appendix 1

Mounting Dimensions To assist the panel designer in laying out a system, the carriers have been classified in the groups shown in Table 1 below.

The drawings for the individual types are shown on the following pages. Each carrier has a reference datum hole. The dimensioning table (Table 2) has been constructed to show the required offset, in the X and Y direction from one carrier’s datum hole to that of the following carrier.

Table 1 - Carrier groups

CONTROLLERS CONTROLLER / EBIM CARRIER 8750-CA-NS

CONTROLLER / EBIM CARRIER – FLOATING EARTH 8751-CA-NS

I/O 8 MODULE CARRIER (32 SLOT ADDRESSING) 8707-CA-08


8-UNIT WIDTH I/O IS 8 MODULE CARRIER (32 SLOT ADDRESSING) 8727-CA-08

I/O IS 8 MODULE CARRIER (64 SLOT ADDRESSING) 8729-CA-08

NODE SERVICES CARRIER (MODBUS) 8711-CA-NS

NODE SERVICES CARRIER (PROFIBUS) 8712-CA-NS


4-UNIT WIDTH I/O IS 4 MODULE CARRIER (32 SLOT ADDRESSING) 8720-CA-04

NODE SERVICES CARRIER (NSM) 8718-CA-NS

REDUNDANT BIM CARRIER 8701-CA-BI

BIM CARRIER 8715-CA-BI

2-UNIT WIDTH PSU 8717-CA-PS

RAILBUS ISOLATOR CARRIER 8723-CA-RB

IS PSU 8724-CA-PS

1-UNIT WIDTH CARRIER EXTENDER (LEFT HAND) 8021-CE-LH

IS CARRIER EXTENDER (LEFT HAND) 8031-CE-LH

Table 2 - Offset dimensions (in mm) between carrier datum holes

FOLLOWING CARRIER

8-UNIT WIDTH 4-UNIT WIDTH 2-UNIT WIDTH 1-UNIT WIDTH

LEADING CARRIER x + →

y + ↑

x + →

y + ↑

x + →

y + ↑

x + →

y + ↑

CONTROLLERS 257.5 67.5 247 67.5 204.75 63.5 215.5 65.75

8-UNIT WIDTH 339.5 0 329 0 286.75 4 297.5 1.75

4-UNIT WIDTH 182 0 171.5 0 129.25 4 140 1.75

2-UNIT WIDTH 140 4 129.5 4 87.5 0 98 2.25

1-UNIT WIDTH 87.5 0.5 77 0.25 34.75 3.75 – –

Example

An 8707-CA-08 (I/O module carrier) is to be followed by an 8723-CA-RB (Railbus Isolator carrier).

1. From Table 1, the 8707-CA-08 has an 8-unit width and the 8723-CA-RB has a 2-unit width.

2. From Table 2 choose the 8-unit width row (of the leading carrier) and follow it across to the 2-unit width column (of the following carrier) to find the x offset of 286.75mm and the y offset of 4mm (both marked in bold in the table).

3. Mark the position of the 8707 carrier, based on the dimensions of Figure 30, then measure 286.75mm to the right of its datum hole position and 4mm up to locate the position of the datum hole for the 8723 carrier.

27 Page 274 of 287

Controllers

63.0

133.0

148.0

12

200

DATUMHOLE

DOT PUNCH4 PLACES

DIN RAILCENTRE LINE

DRILL AND TAP M64 PLACES

CARRIEROUTLINE

GAP ALLOWANCE5.5-6.5mmTO NEXT CARRIER

INTERSECTIONPOINT

Figure 30 - Controller carrier

28 Page 275 of 287

8-unit width

25.540

134.0

165.5

DATUMHOLE

DIN RAILCENTRE LINE


INTERSECTIONPOINT

CARRIEROUTLINE

DOT PUNCH4 PLACES

GAP ALLOWANCE2.5-3.5mmTO NEXT CARRIER

Figure 31 – 8-unit width carrier

29 Page 276 of 287

4-unit width

GAPALLOWANCE 1.5-2.5mmTO NEXT CARRIER

53.5 63.00

21

105

170

DATUMHOLE

DIN RAILCENTRE LINE


INTERSECTIONPOINT

CARRIEROUTLINE

DOT PUNCH4 PLACES


2-unit width

DATUMHOLE DOT PUNCH

5 PLACES


63

63

86

DIN RAILCENTRE LINE


CARRIEROUTLINE

INTERSECTIONPOINT

30.511.5


30 Page 277 of 287

1-unit width

DATUMHOLE

DIN RAILCENTRE LINE



42

21

INTERSECTIONPOINT

CARRIEROUTLINE

2 PLACESDOT PUNCH


31 Page 278 of 287

Appendix 2

Field Terminal connections Identify the terminal type in the table then refer to the appropriate diagram for connection details.

Terminal type Diagram No.

8601-FT-NI 1

8602-FT-ST 1

8603-FT-FU 1

8604-FT-FU 1

8605-FT-TC 2

8606-FT-RT (2-wire) 3

8606-FT-RT (3-wire) 4

8606-FT-RT (4-wire) 5

8607-FT-TC 8

8608-FT-NI (Xmtr) 9

8608-FT-NI (2-wire RTD) 10

8608-FT-NI (3-wire RTD) 11

8610-FT-NA 1

8611-FT-FU 1

8615-FT-4W 1

8617-FT-NI 6 or 7

8618-FT-MT See datasheet

8619-FT-MT See datasheet

8650-FT-PX See datasheet

Diagram 1

Diagram 2

Diagram 3

Diagram 4

Diagram 5

32 Page 279 of 287

Diagram 6

Diagram 7 - for 8125 and 8127

Diagram 8

Diagram 9

Diagram 10

Diagram 11

33 Page 280 of 287

Appendix 3

Glossary of special terms Some of the terms used in this manual may be unfamiliar to the reader. The following glossary is intended as a very brief introduction to some of them.

2/2, 2/1, 2/x This terminology refers to the application code and is explained on page 2 of this manual.

Bussed Field Power - BFP Some field circuits, located in safe areas, Division 2 or Zone 2 hazardous areas, require electrical power for them to operate correctly. The MTL8000 series I/O modules can provide this power directly at the field terminal assembly using a technique called Bussed Field Power. Connectors are provided at the top/rear of 2/2 carriers and the power is then routed directly to one or more field terminal assemblies as required. This avoids extra power supply wiring at the field terminals.

Intrinsic Safety - IS Intrinsic safety is a circuit protection technique used in I/O applications where there is a risk of explosive atmospheres. The IS components restrict the electrical energy available to the area thus preventing sparks that might be capable of igniting the combustible atmosphere.

Railbus This is both a digital signal ‘bus’, that carries control information between the BIM and the I/O modules, and a power supply bus, that distributes the 12V DC supply rail to all of the modules. It is distributed, physically, to the modules via the carrier printed circuit board, and continues from one carrier to the next via multipin connectors.

Railbus Isolator When IS and non-IS field wiring is accommodated at a single node, an isolating barrier is required between the two sections to prevent fault voltages being carried to the IS section via the Railbus. The Railbus Isolator provides galvanic isolation between the two sections.

34 Page 281 of 287

Appendix 4

ATEX information The Essential Health and Safety Requirements (Annex II) of the EU Directive 94/9/EC [the ATEX Directive - safety of apparatus] requires that the installation manual of all equipment used in hazardous areas shall contain certain information. This annex is included to ensure that this requirement is met. It compliments the information presented in this document and does not conflict with that information. It is only relevant to those locations where the ATEX Directives are applicable.

1 General a) In common with all other electrical apparatus installed in hazardous areas, this apparatus

must only be installed, operated and maintained by competent personnel. Such personnel shall have undergone training, which included instruction on the various types of protection and installation practices, the relevant rules and regulations, and on the general principles of area classification. Appropriate refresher training shall be given on a regular basis. [See clause 4.2 of EN 60079-17].

b) This apparatus meets the requirements of protection 'n' in accordance with EN 50021. c) This apparatus has been designed and manufactured so as to provide protection against all the

relevant additional hazards referred to in Annex II of the directive, such as those in clause 1.2.7.

2 Installation a) The installation should comply with the appropriate European, national and local regulations,

which may include reference to the IEC code of practice IEC 60079-14. In addition particular industries or end users may have specific requirements relating to the safety of their installations and these requirements should also be met. For the majority of installations the Directive 1999/92/EC [the ATEX Directive - safety of installations] is also applicable.

b) This apparatus is normally mounted in a non-hazardous [safe] area; however, it also meets the requirements of Category 3 apparatus and may be installed in a Zone2 location providing that the relevant installation conditions are met.

c) This apparatus must not be subjected to mechanical and thermal stresses in excess of those permitted in the certification documentation, this manual and the product specification. If necessary the product must be protected by an enclosure to prevent mechanical damage.

d) The apparatus must not be installed in a position where it may be attacked by aggressive substances and must be protected from excessive dust, moisture and other contaminants by an enclosure.

3 Inspection and maintenance a) Inspection and maintenance should be carried out in accordance with European, national and

local regulations which may refer to the IEC standard IEC 60079-17. In addition specific industries or end users may have specific requirements which should also be met.

b) Access to the internal circuitry must not be made during operation. c) If the outer enclosure of the apparatus needs to be cleaned, this should be done with a cloth

lightly moistened by a dilute mixture of detergent in water.

4 Repair a) The product cannot be repaired by the user and must be replaced with an equivalent certified

product. Repairs should be carried out only by the manufacturer or his authorised agent.

5 Marking a) The products are labelled in a manner that is indicated below. In addition the serial number

and/or date of manufacture are marked on the individual apparatus. This manual applies to products manufactured and date marked during or after the year 2005.

The following common information is provided on each component:

Company Logo:

Company Name and Address: Measurement Technology Limited, Luton, England.

European compliance mark:

35 Page 282 of 287

8101-HI-TX 8-channel AI, 4-20mA with HART® MTL00ATEX8101

II 3 G EEx n L IIC T3 @+70°C EEx n L IIC T4 @+60°C –40 to +70°C Special conditions of use: 1. Apparatus must be used with the 8601-FT-NI,

8603-FT-FU or 8615-FT-4W field terminals. 8102-HO-IP 8-channel AO, 4-20mA with HART® MTL00ATEX8102

II 3 G EEx n L IIC T4 –40 to +70°C Special conditions of use: 1. Apparatus must be used with the 8601-FT-NI or

8603-FT-FU field terminals. 8103-AI-TX 8-channel AI, 4-20mA MTL00ATEX8103

II 3 G EEx n L IIC T3 @+70°C EEx n L IIC T4 @+60°C –40 to +70°C Special conditions of use: 1. Apparatus must be used with the 8601-FT-NI or

8603-FT-FU field terminals. 8104-AO-IP 8-channel AO, 4-20mA MTL00ATEX8104

II 3 G EEx n L IIC T4 –40 to +70°C Special conditions of use: 1. Apparatus must be used with the 8601-FT-NI or

8603-FT-FU field terminals. 8105-TI-TC 4-channel THC/mV input MTL98ATEX8105

II 3 G EEx n L IIC T4 –40 to +70°C 8106-TI-RT 4-channel RTD input MTL98ATEX8106

II 3 G EEx n L IIC T4 –40 to +70°C Special conditions of use: 1. Apparatus must be used with the 8606-FT-RT

field terminal. 8109-DI-DC 8-channel DI, 24V DC isolated, sinking MTL98ATEX8109

II 3 G EEx n L IIC T4 –40 to +70°C Note: Special conditions of use are not marked on the products but are part of the product certification details.

8110-DI-DC 8-channel DI 24V DC non-isolated module-powered MTL98ATEX8110

II 3 G EEx n L IIC T4 –40 to +70°C 8111-DI-AC 8-channel DI 115V AC isolated sinking MTL98ATEX8111

II 3 G EEx n VL IIC T4 –40 to +70°C 8112-DI-AC 8-channel DI 115V AC non-isolated module-powered MTL98ATEX8112

II 3 G EEx n VL IIC T4 –40 to +70°C 8113-DI-AC 8-channel DI 230V AC isolated sinking MTL98ATEX8113

II 3 G EEx n VL IIC T4 –40 to +70°C 8114-DI-AC 8-channel DI 230V AC non-isolated module-powered MTL98ATEX8114

II 3 G EEx n VL IIC T4 –40 to +70°C 8115-DO-DC 8-channel DO 2-60V DC non-isolated, module-powered MTL98ATEX8115

II 3 G EEx n VL IIC T4 –40 to +70°C 8116-DO-AC 8-channel DO 20-265V AC non-isolated, module-powered MTL98ATEX8116

II 3 G EEx n VL IIC T4 –40 to +70°C 8117-DO-DC 8-channel DO 2-60V DC isolated, unpowered MTL98ATEX8117

II 3 G EEx n VL IIC T4 –40 to +70°C 8118-DO-AC 8-channel DO 20-265V AC isolated, unpowered MTL98ATEX8118

II 3 G EEx n L IIC T3 @+70°C EEx n L IIC T4 @+60°C –40 to +70°C

36 Page 283 of 287

8119-VI-05 8502-BI-DP Profibus-DP BIM 8-channel AI 1-5V DC

MTL00ATEX8119 MTL99ATEX8502

II 3 G II 3 G EEx n L IIC T3 @+70°C EEx n VL IIC T4 EEx n L IIC T4 @+60°C –40 to +70°C –40 to +70°C Special conditions of use: 8505-BI-MB

Modbus BIM 1. Apparatus must be used with the 8615-FT-4W field terminal.

MTL98ATEX8505

II 3 G 8121-DI-DC EEx n VL IIC T4 16-channel DI 24V DC non-isolated, module-powered –40 to +70°C MTL00ATEX8121

II 3 G 8512-IF-HA HART interface module EEx n L IIC T4

–40 to +70°C MTL00ATEX8512 II 3 G 8122-DI-DC EEx n A IIC T4 16-channel DI 24V DC isolated, sinking –40 to +70°C MTL00ATEX8122 Special conditions of use:

II 3 G 1. The apparatus must be used in conjunction with the 8502-BI-DP or the 8505-BI-MB Bus Interface Module.

EEx n L IIC T4 –40 to +70°C 8123-PI-QU 8510-MO-NS

Node services module 2-channel pulse/quadrature input MTL01ATEX8123X MTL01ATEX8510X

II 3 G II 3 G EEx n L IIC T4 EEx n L IIC T4 –40 to +70°C –40 to +70°C Special conditions of use: Special conditions of use: 1. Apparatus must be used with the 8601-FT-NI or

8603-FT-FU field terminals. 1. The apparatus is designed to be mounted on a

Node Services Carrier, for example 8711-CA-NS, 8712-CA-NS or 8718-CA-NS. 2. The apparatus must be installed in an enclosure

that is suitable for the application and provides a minimum level of protection of IP54, or in an environment that provides the equivalent degree of ingress protection.

2. The apparatus must be installed in an enclosure that is suitable for the application and provides a minimum level of protection of IP54, or in an environment that provides the equivalent degree of ingress protection.

8132-AI-UN 8-channel isolated universal analogue input MTL06ATEX8132X

II 3 G D Ex nA [nL] IIC T5 and Ex nA [ic] IIC T5 –40 to +70°C Special conditions of use:

a) The apparatus must be installed in an enclosure or an environment that provides a degree of protection not less than IP54.

b) The power supplies for this apparatus must be provided by regulated power supply units complying with the requirements of European Community Directives.

c) The apparatus must not be inserted onto or removed from its carrier unless either i) the area in which it is installed is known to be non-hazardous, or ii) the Bussed Field Power supply has been de-energised.

d) When the apparatus is installed in a Zone 22 environment, the enclosure in which it is mounted must meet the requirements of BS EN 61241-1:2004 Clause 6, i.e. IP6X etc.

e) The 8132-AI-UN has eight input channels each consisting of four terminals on appropriate field terminals. (e.g. 8607-FT-TC or 8608-FT-NI.) The safety parameters applicable to a particular channel depend upon which terminals are used and how the module is configured by the software. The diagram and tables below specify the appropriate values.

+

-

2 wire RTD

+-

3 wire RTD

4 wire Xmit

2 wire Xmit

+-

mVor V

12 14 162 4 6 8 10

27 29 3117 19 21 23 25

28 30 3218 20 22 24 26

11 13 151 3 5 7 9

THC

37 Page 284 of 287

Connection to millivolts, volts or thermocouples when the hazardous area may contain a source of power. Uo = 1.5V Io = 1µA Po = 1.5µW Ui = 25V Ii = N/A

Group Co (µF) per channel Lo (mH) per channel IIC 1000 1000 IIB 1000 1000 IIA 1000 1000

Connection to 4-wire transmitters when the hazardous area may contain a source of power. Uo = 3.6V Io = 2µA Po = 7.2µW Ui = N/A Ii = 25mA

Group Co (µF) per channel Lo (mH) per channel IIC 1000 104 IIB 1000 415 IIA 1000 829

Connection to any combination of the four terminals. Uo = 20V Io = 75mA Po = 1.5W

Group Co (µF) per channel Lo (mH) per channel IIC 0.61 11.5 IIB 3.76 46 IIA 14.6 92

The cable parameters for a system will be determined by the combined sources of power within the system. f) When any of the circuits are used in the ‘ic’ mode then care must be taken to ensure that the required

segregation [50mm] between intrinsically safe circuits and other circuits at the field terminals is maintained.

8810-HI-TX 8-channel Safety AI, 4-20mA MTL05ATEX8810X

II 3 G D Ex ic nA IIC T4 Ex tc IIIC T100°C and Ex nA nL IIC T4 Ex tc IIIC T100°C –40 to +70°C Special conditions of Safe use:

a) The final enclosure must provide a degree of protection of IP54 in Zone 2. b) The product must not be inserted onto or removed from its carrier unless either

i. the area in which it is installed is known to be non-hazardous, or ii. the Bussed Field Power supply has been de-energised.

c) When the apparatus is installed in a Zone 22 environment, the enclosure in which it is mounted must meet the requirements of BS EN 61241-1:2004 Clause 6, i.e. IP6X etc.

d) The low power dissipation of the apparatus ensures that the surface temperature of the outer enclosure will not normally exceed 100°C. Hence the marking for dusts of T100°C.

e) In order to comply with the transient requirements, the voltage for this apparatus must be provided by regulated power supply units complying with the requirements of European Community Directives.

f) The Bussed Field Power supply voltage must be no more than 30V dc in order that the maximum value of Uo is not exceeded. The power supplies which provide this voltage must operate within their output current ratings.

g) When connected to ‘ic’ circuits, the field terminals must be at least 50mm from the terminals of non-intrinsically safe circuits.

8811-IO-DC 8-channel Safety Discrete Input/Output MTL05ATEX8811X

II 3 G D Ex ic nA IIC T4 Ex tc IIIC T100°C and Ex nA nL IIC T4 Ex tc IIIC T100°C –40 to +70°C Special conditions of Safe use:

a) The apparatus must be installed in an enclosure or an environment that provides a degree of protection of not less than IP54.

b) The apparatus must not be inserted onto or removed from its carrier unless either i. the area in which it is installed is known to be non-hazardous, or

ii. the Bussed Field Power supply has been de-energised. c) When the apparatus is installed in a Zone 22 environment, the enclosure in which it is mounted must meet

the requirements of BS EN 61241-1:2004 Clause 6, i.e. IP6X etc. d) The low power dissipation of the apparatus ensures that the surface temperature of the outer enclosure

will not normally exceed 100°C at the maximum ambient temperature. Hence the making for dusts of T100°C.

e) In order to comply with the transient requirements, the voltage for this apparatus must be provided by regulated power supply units complying with the requirements of European Community Directives.

38 Page 285 of 287

f) The Bussed Field Power supply voltage must be no more than 30V dc in order that the maximum value of Uo for the energy-limited inputs is not exceeded. The power supply units which provide this voltage must operate within their output current ratings.

g) When connected to ‘ic’ circuits, the field terminals must be at least 50mm from the terminals of non-intrinsically safe circuits. Therefore, an apparatus (module) connected to ‘ic’ inputs must not have any channels configured as outputs. However, non-intrinsically safe circuits and ‘nL’ inputs may be connected to the same module.

39 Page 286 of 287

MTL Instruments Pty Limited 9 Vinnicombe Drive PO Box 1441, Canning Vale, Perth, WA 6155 Australia Tel: +61 (0)8 9455 2994 Fax: +61 (0)8 9455 2805 E-mail: [email protected] MTL Canada Safety Instrumentation 20 Regan Road, Unit 17 Brampton, Ontario L7A 1C3 Canada Tel: +1 905 840 7850 Fax: +1 905 840 7852 E-mail: [email protected] MTL Instruments (Beijing) Room 07-05A, The Gateway No 10 Yabao Road, Chaoyang District Beijing 100020 Tel: +86 010 8562 5718, 5720, 5721 Fax: +86 010 8562 5725 E-mail: [email protected] MTL Instruments sarl Bâtiment SILIC 4, 1 rue des Vergers 69760 Limonest France Tel: +33 (0)4 78 64 98 32 Fax: +33 (0)4 78 35 79 41 E-mail: [email protected] MTL Instruments GmbH An der Gümpgesbrücke 17 41564 Kaarst Germany Tel: +49 (0)2131 718930 Fax: +49 (0)2131 7189333 E-mail: [email protected] MTL India Private Limited No. 36, Nehru Street, Off Old Mahabalipuram Road Sholinganallur, Chennai - 600 119 Tel: + 91 (0)44 4501660/4501857 Fax: + 91 (0)44 4501463 E-mail: [email protected] MTL Italia srl Via Fosse Ardeatine, 4 I - 20092 Cinisello Balsamo MI Italy Tel: +39 (0)2 61802011 Fax: +39 (0)2 61294560 E-mail: [email protected]

MTL Instruments KK 3rd Floor, Gotanda Masujima Building 1-8-13 Higashi-Gotanda, Shinagawa-Ku Tokyo 141-0022 Japan Tel: +81 (0)3 5420 1281 Fax: +81 (0)3 5420 2405 E-mail: [email protected] MTL Instruments BV MTL Systems BV de Houtakker 33, 6681 CW Bemmel The Netherlands Tel: +31 (0)48 1450250 Fax: +31 (0)48 1450260 E-mail: [email protected] MTL Instruments Pte Limited 150 Kampong Ampat #06-01 KA Centre Singapore 368324 Tel: +65 487 7887 Fax: +65 487 7997 E-mail: [email protected] MTL Instruments PO Box 7392, Abu Dhabi UAE Tel: +971 2 766316 Fax: +971 2 723837 E-mail: [email protected] MTL Instruments Power Court, Luton, Bedfordshire England LU1 3JJ Tel: +44 (0)1582 723633 Fax: ++44 (0)1582 422283 E-mail: [email protected] MTL Incorporated 9 Merrill Industrial Drive, Hampton NH 03842 USA Tel: +1 800 835 7075, +1 603 926 0090 Fax: +1 603 926 1899 E-mail: [email protected]

Web address: http://www.mtl-inst.com

Members of The MTL Instruments Group plc

Page 287 of 287